Contents
Safety information.........................................................................................7
Conventions...........................................................................................................................................................7
Product statements..............................................................................................................................................7
Learning about the printer......................................................................... 10
Finding information about the printer...........................................................................................................10
Finding the printer serial number....................................................................................................................11
Selecting a location for the printer................................................................................................................ 12
Printer configurations........................................................................................................................................ 13
Attaching cables.................................................................................................................................................16
Using the control panel.....................................................................................................................................17
Understanding the status of the power button and indicator light....................................................... 17
Setting up and using the home screen applications..............................19
Using the home screen.....................................................................................................................................19
Customizing the home screen.......................................................................................................................20
Supported applications................................................................................................................................... 20
Setting up Card Copy.......................................................................................................................................20
Creating a shortcut............................................................................................................................................ 21
Using Display Customization.......................................................................................................................... 21
Setting up Scan Center....................................................................................................................................22
Setting up Device Quotas...............................................................................................................................22
Using QR Code Generator..............................................................................................................................23
Configuring Eco‑Settings................................................................................................................................ 23
Using Customer Support.................................................................................................................................23
Creating a Cloud Connector profile............................................................................................................. 23
Managing bookmarks.......................................................................................................................................24
Managing contacts............................................................................................................................................25
Setting up and using the accessibility features......................................27
Enabling Magnification mode.........................................................................................................................27
Activating Voice Guidance..............................................................................................................................27
Adjusting the Voice Guidance speech rate................................................................................................27
Navigating the screen using gestures......................................................................................................... 27
Using the keyboard on the display...............................................................................................................28
Contents 2
Enabling spoken passwords or personal identification numbers........................................................ 28
Loading paper and specialty media......................................................... 29
Setting the size and type of the specialty media......................................................................................29
Configuring Universal paper settings.......................................................................................................... 29
Loading the 550‑sheet tray............................................................................................................................29
Loading the 2100‑sheet tray.......................................................................................................................... 32
Loading the multipurpose feeder..................................................................................................................37
Linking trays........................................................................................................................................................38
Paper support..............................................................................................39
Supported paper sizes.....................................................................................................................................39
Supported paper types....................................................................................................................................42
Supported paper weights................................................................................................................................43
Printing.........................................................................................................46
Printing from a computer.................................................................................................................................46
Printing from a mobile device........................................................................................................................ 46
Printing from a flash drive................................................................................................................................47
Supported flash drives and file types.......................................................................................................... 48
Configuring confidential jobs......................................................................................................................... 49
Printing confidential and other held jobs....................................................................................................49
Printing from a Cloud Connector profile.....................................................................................................50
Printing a font sample list.................................................................................................................................51
Printing a directory list...................................................................................................................................... 51
Canceling a print job......................................................................................................................................... 51
Copying........................................................................................................52
Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass.................................................................... 52
Making copies....................................................................................................................................................52
Copying photos................................................................................................................................................. 52
Copying on letterhead..................................................................................................................................... 53
Copying on both sides of the paper.............................................................................................................53
Reducing or enlarging copies........................................................................................................................53
Collating copies................................................................................................................................................. 53
Placing separator sheets between copies................................................................................................. 53
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet............................................................................................. 54
Contents 3
Creating a copy shortcut................................................................................................................................. 54
E-mailing...................................................................................................... 55
Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass.................................................................... 55
Configuring the e‑mail SMTP settings.........................................................................................................55
Sending an e-mail..............................................................................................................................................63
Creating an e-mail shortcut............................................................................................................................ 63
Faxing...........................................................................................................64
Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass.................................................................... 64
Setting up the printer to fax............................................................................................................................64
Sending a fax......................................................................................................................................................72
Scheduling a fax.................................................................................................................................................73
Creating a fax destination shortcut...............................................................................................................73
Changing the fax resolution............................................................................................................................73
Adjusting the fax darkness..............................................................................................................................74
Printing a fax log................................................................................................................................................ 74
Blocking junk faxes........................................................................................................................................... 74
Holding faxes......................................................................................................................................................74
Forwarding a fax................................................................................................................................................ 74
Scanning...................................................................................................... 76
Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass.....................................................................76
Scanning to a computer...................................................................................................................................76
Scanning to an FTP server.............................................................................................................................. 77
Scanning to a network folder......................................................................................................................... 78
Creating an FTP shortcut.................................................................................................................................78
Scanning to a flash drive................................................................................................................................. 78
Scanning to a Cloud Connector profile....................................................................................................... 79
Understanding the printer menus............................................................80
Menu map........................................................................................................................................................... 80
Device....................................................................................................................................................................81
Print.......................................................................................................................................................................95
Paper................................................................................................................................................................... 104
Copy.................................................................................................................................................................... 107
Fax..........................................................................................................................................................................111
Contents 4
E-mail...................................................................................................................................................................124
FTP.......................................................................................................................................................................130
USB Drive...........................................................................................................................................................135
Network/Ports.................................................................................................................................................... 141
Security...............................................................................................................................................................153
Reports............................................................................................................................................................... 160
Help...................................................................................................................................................................... 161
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................... 162
Printing the Menu Settings Page.................................................................................................................162
Securing the printer..................................................................................163
Locating the security slot...............................................................................................................................163
Erasing printer memory..................................................................................................................................163
Erasing printer hard disk memory............................................................................................................... 163
Encrypting the printer hard disk...................................................................................................................164
Restoring factory default settings................................................................................................................164
Statement of Volatility.....................................................................................................................................164
Maintaining the printer............................................................................ 166
Configuring supply notifications.................................................................................................................. 166
Setting up e‑mail alerts.................................................................................................................................. 166
Viewing reports................................................................................................................................................166
Adjusting the speaker volume......................................................................................................................167
Networking........................................................................................................................................................ 167
Setting up serial printing (Windows only)................................................................................................... 171
Cleaning printer parts...................................................................................................................................... 171
Ordering parts and supplies......................................................................................................................... 186
Replacing parts and supplies....................................................................................................................... 190
Moving the printer........................................................................................................................................... 215
Saving energy and paper.............................................................................................................................. 216
Recycling............................................................................................................................................................ 217
Clearing jams.............................................................................................218
Avoiding jams................................................................................................................................................... 218
Identifying jam locations................................................................................................................................ 219
Paper jam in trays........................................................................................................................................... 220
Paper jam in door A.........................................................................................................................................221
Contents 5
Paper jam in door C........................................................................................................................................223
Paper jam in the standard bin......................................................................................................................224
Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder.......................................................................................................225
Paper jam in the automatic document feeder.........................................................................................226
Paper jam in the 4‑bin mailbox....................................................................................................................228
Paper jam in the oset stacker or staple finisher...................................................................................229
Paper jam in the staple, hole punch finisher............................................................................................ 231
Staple jam in the staple finisher..................................................................................................................232
Staple jam in the staple, hole punch finisher...........................................................................................235
Troubleshooting....................................................................................... 238
Print quality problems....................................................................................................................................238
Printing problems............................................................................................................................................239
The printer is not responding......................................................................................................................269
Unable to read flash drive............................................................................................................................ 270
Enabling the USB port................................................................................................................................... 270
Network connection problems....................................................................................................................270
Hardware options problems.........................................................................................................................273
Issues with supplies........................................................................................................................................274
Paper feed problems..................................................................................................................................... 275
E-mailing problems.........................................................................................................................................280
Faxing problems............................................................................................................................................. 280
Scanning problems........................................................................................................................................ 286
Contacting customer support......................................................................................................................293
Upgrading and migrating........................................................................294
Hardware.......................................................................................................................................................... 294
Software............................................................................................................................................................. 315
Firmware.............................................................................................................................................................318
Notices........................................................................................................319
Index...........................................................................................................335
Contents 6
Safety information
Conventions
Note: A note identifies information that could help you.
Warning: A warning identifies something that could damage the product hardware or software.
CAUTION: A caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could injure you.
Dierent types of caution statements include:
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Indicates a risk of injury.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Indicates a risk of electrical shock.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: Indicates a risk of burn if touched.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Indicates a crush hazard.
CAUTION—PINCH HAZARD: Indicates a risk of being caught between moving parts.
Product statements
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to
an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, use only the power cord
provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use this product with extension cords, multioutlet power strips,
multioutlet extenders, or UPS devices. The power capacity of these types of accessories can be easily
overloaded by a laser printer and may result in a risk of fire, property damage, or poor printer
performance.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Only a Lexmark Inline Surge Protector that is properly connected
between the printer and the power cord provided with the printer may be used with this product. The
use of non-Lexmark surge protection devices may result in a risk of fire, property damage, or poor
printer performance.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not place or use this product near
water or wet locations.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
Safety information 7
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power
cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects
such as furniture and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect
the power cord regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet
before inspecting it.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, make sure that all external
connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed in their marked
plug-in ports.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn
the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any
other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the
printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: If the printer weight is greater than 20 kg (44 lb), then it may require
two or more people to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: When moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal
injury or printer damage:
• Make sure that all doors and trays are closed.
• Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.
• If the printer has separate floor-standing optional trays or output options attached to it, then disconnect
them before moving the printer.
• If the printer has a caster base, then carefully roll it to the new location. Use caution when passing over
thresholds and breaks in
flooring.
• If the printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays or output options, then remove
the output options and lift the printer
o
the trays. Do not try to lift the printer and any options at the same
time.
• Always use the handholds on the printer to lift it.
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
• Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the
options.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.
• Make sure that your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Make sure that there is adequate clearance around the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a
caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information
on supported configurations, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Safety information 8
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
CAUTION—PINCH HAZARD: To avoid the risk of a pinch injury, use caution in areas marked with this
label. Pinch injuries may occur around moving parts, such as gears, doors, trays, and covers.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or
performance of procedures other than those specified in the User’s Guide may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced.
There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble,
or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions
and local regulations.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer
is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release
emissions. You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for
selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
This product may produce small amounts of ozone during normal operation, and may be equipped with a filter
designed to limit ozone concentrations to levels well below the recommended exposure limits. To avoid high
ozone concentration levels during extensive usage, install this product in a well-ventilated area and replace
the ozone and exhaust filters if instructed to do so in the product maintenance instructions. If there are no
references to filters in the product maintenance instructions, then there are no filters requiring replacement for
this product.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Safety information 9
Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for? Find it here
Initial setup instructions See the setup documentation that came with the
printer.
• Printer software
• Print or fax driver
• Printer firmware
• Utility
Go to
www.lexmark.com/downloads, search for
your printer model, and then in the Type menu,
select the driver,
firmware,
or utility that you need.
• Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
• Loading paper
• Configuring printer settings
• Viewing and printing documents and photos
• Configuring the printer on a network
• Caring for and maintaining the printer
• Troubleshooting and solving problems
Information Center—Go to
https://infoserve.lexmark.com.
How‑to videos—Go to
https://infoserve.lexmark.com/idv/.
Help Menu Pages—Access the guides on the
printer
firmware,
or go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
Touch Screen Guide—Go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
Setting up and configuring the accessibility features of your
printer
Lexmark Accessibility Guide—Go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
Help information for using the printer software Help for Microsoft Windows or Macintosh operating
systems—Open a printer software program or
application, and then click Help.
Click
?
to view context‑sensitive information.
Notes:
• Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
• Depending on the operating system, the
printer software is either in the printer
program folder or on the desktop.
Learning about the printer 10
What are you looking for? Find it here
• Documentation
• Live chat support
• E‑mail support
• Voice support
Go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
Note: Select your country or region, and then
select your product to view the appropriate
support site.
Support contact information for your country or
region can be found on the website or on the
printed warranty that came with the printer.
Have the following information ready when you
contact customer support:
• Place and date of purchase
• Machine type and serial number
For more information, see
“Finding the printer
serial number” on page 11.
• Safety information
• Regulatory information
• Warranty information
• Environmental information
Warranty information varies by country or region:
• In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited
Warranty included with the printer, or go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
• In other countries and regions—See the
printed warranty that came with the printer.
Product Information Guide—See the
documentation that came with the printer or go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
Finding the printer serial number
1 Open door A.
Learning about the printer 11
2 Locate the serial number at the left side of the printer.
Selecting a location for the printer
• Leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors and to install hardware options.
• Set up the printer near an electrical outlet.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not place or use this product
near water or wet locations.
• Make sure that airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical
Committee 156 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:
– Clean, dry, and free of dust
– Away from stray staples and paper clips
– Away from the direct
airflow
of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators
– Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes
• Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations.
Ambient temperature 10 to 32.2°C (50 to 90°F)
Storage temperature -40 to 43.3°C (-40 to 110°F)
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
Learning about the printer 12
1 Top 15 2 mm (6 i n.)
2 Rear 152 mm (6 in.)
3 Right side 152 mm (6 in.)
4 Front 406 mm (16 in.)
Note: The minimum space needed in front of the printer is 75 mm (3 in.)
5 Left side 152 mm (6 in.)
Printer configurations
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a
caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information
on supported configurations, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
You can configure your printer by adding optional 550‑ or 2100‑sheet trays. For more information, see
“Installing
the 550‑sheet tray” on page 306 or “Installing the 2100‑sheet tray” on page 307.
Learning about the printer 13
Basic model
1 Automatic document feeder (ADF) tray
2 ADF bin
3 Standard bin
4 Multipurpose feeder
5 Standard 550‑sheet tray
6 Control panel
7 ADF
Learning about the printer 14
Configured model
Hardware option Alternative hardware option
1 4‑bin mailbox
• Oset stacker
• Staple finisher
• Staple, hole punch finisher
2 2100‑sheet tray 550‑sheet trays
3 Caster base Caster base
4 550‑sheet trays 2100‑sheet tray
5 Staple finisher
• 4‑bin mailbox
• Staple, hole punch finisher
• Oset stacker
When using optional trays:
• Always use a caster base when the printer is
configured
with a 2100‑sheet tray.
• The 2100‑sheet tray must always be at the bottom of a
configuration.
• If the 2100‑sheet tray is installed, then you cannot use an optional 550‑sheet tray.
• A maximum of two optional trays may be configured with the printer.
• The printer supports only one finisher at a time.
Learning about the printer 15
Attaching cables
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to
an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, use only the power cord
provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of
fire,
use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch the USB cable, any
wireless network adapter, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing.
Printer port Function
1 Power cord socket Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
2 USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer.
3 Ethernet port Connect the printer to a network.
4 USB port Attach a keyboard or any compatible option.
5 EXT port
Note: Available only in some
printer models.
Connect more devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer
and the telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax
line for the printer and if this connection method is supported in your
country or region.
6 LINE port
Note: Available only in some
printer models.
Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall
jack (RJ‑11), DSL filter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you
to access the telephone line to send and receive faxes.
Learning about the printer 16
Using the control panel
Use the To
1 Display
• View the printer messages and supply status.
• Set up and operate the printer.
2 Home button Go to the home screen.
3 Power button
• Turn on or turn o the printer.
Note: To turn o the printer, press and hold the power button for five
seconds.
• Set the printer to Sleep or Hibernate mode.
• Wake the printer from Sleep or Hibernate mode.
4 Keypad Enter numbers or symbols in an input field.
5 Pause button Place a dial pause in a fax number.
6 Start button Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.
7 Clear all or Reset button Reset the default settings of a function such as copying, faxing, or scanning.
8 Stop or Cancel button Stop the current job.
9 Backspace button Move the cursor backward and delete a character in an input field.
10 Indicator light Check the status of the printer.
11 Volume buttons Adjust the volume of the headset or speaker.
12 Headset or speaker port Attach a headset or speaker.
Note: This feature is available only in some printer units.
Understanding the status of the power button and
indicator light
Indicator light Printer status
O The printer is o or in Hibernate mode.
Blue The printer is ready or processing data.
Learning about the printer 17
Indicator light Printer status
Red The printer requires user intervention.
Power button light Printer status
O The printer is o, ready, or processing data.
Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber The printer is in Hibernate mode.
Learning about the printer 18
Setting up and using the home screen
applications
Using the home screen
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative
setup, and active embedded solutions.
Touc h To
1 Copy Make copies.
2 E‑mail Send e‑mails.
3 Settings Access the printer menus.
4 Fax Send fax.
5 Address Book Manage a contact list that other applications on the printer can access.
6 Status/Supplies
• Show a printer warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention
to continue processing.
• View more information on the printer warning or message, and on how to clear it.
Note: You can also access this setting by touching the top section of the home
screen.
7 USB Drive
• Print photos and documents from a flash drive.
• Scan photos and documents to a
flash
drive
8 Job Queue Show all the current print jobs.
Note: You can also access this setting by touching the top section of the home
screen.
9 Held Jobs Show the print jobs that are held in the printer memory.
10 Shortcut Center Organize all shortcuts.
11 App Profiles Access application profiles.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 19
Touc h To
12 Scan Profiles Scan and save documents directly to the computer.
13 FTP Scan and save documents directly to an FTP server.
14 Bookmarks Organize all bookmarks.
15 Change Language Change the language on the display.
Customizing the home screen
1 From the control panel, touch Settings > Device > Visible Home Screen Icons.
2 Select the icons that you want to appear on the home screen.
3 Apply the changes.
Supported applications
Application Printer models
Scan Center MX822, MX826, XM7355, XM7370
Shortcut Center MX822, MX826, XM7355, XM7370
Card Copy MX822, MX826, XM7355, XM7370
Display Customization MX822, MX826, XM7355, XM7370
Cloud Connector MX822, MX826, XM7355, XM7370
Customer Support XM7355, XM7370
Device Quotas XM7355, XM7370
QR Code XM7355, XM7370
Eco‑Settings XM7355, XM7370
Setting up Card Copy
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
2 Click Apps > Card Copy > Configure.
Notes:
• Make sure that Display Icon is enabled.
• Make sure that E‑mail Settings and Network Share Settings are configured.
• When scanning a card, make sure that the scan resolution does not exceed 200 dpi for color and
400 dpi for black and white.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 20
• When scanning multiple cards, make sure that the scan resolution does not exceed 150 dpi for color
and 300 dpi for black and white.
3 Apply the changes.
Note: You need a printer hard disk to scan multiple cards.
Creating a shortcut
1 From the home screen, touch Shortcut Center.
Note: The icon and name may have been changed. For more information, contact your administrator.
2 Select a printer function, and then touch Create Shortcut.
Note: The Secure E‑mail function is not supported.
3 Configure the settings, and then touch Save.
4 Type a unique shortcut name.
Note: To avoid clipped names on the home screen, type only up to 25 characters.
5 Tou ch OK.
The application automatically generates a unique shortcut number. To launch the shortcut, press # and then
the shortcut number.
Using Display Customization
Before using the application, make sure to do the following:
• From the Embedded Web Server, click Apps > Display Customization > Configure.
• Enable and
configure
the screen saver, slideshow, and wallpaper settings.
Managing screen saver and slide show images
1 From the Screen Saver and Slideshow Images section, add, edit, or delete an image.
Notes:
• You can add up to 10 images.
• When enabled, the status icons appear on the screen saver only when there are errors, warnings, or
cloud‑based notifications.
2 Apply the changes.
Changing the wallpaper image
1 From the home screen, touch Change Wallpaper.
2 Select an image to use.
3 Apply the changes.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 21
Running a slide show from a flash drive
1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
2 From the home screen, touch Slideshow.
Images appear in alphabetical order.
Note: You can remove the flash drive after the slide show starts, but the images are not stored in the
printer. If the slide show stops, then insert the flash drive again to view the images.
Setting up Scan Center
1 From the home screen, touch Scan Center.
2 Select and create a destination, and then
configure
the settings.
Notes:
• When creating a network destination, make sure to validate and adjust the settings until no errors
occur.
• Only destinations created from the Embedded Web Server are saved. For more information, see the
documentation that came with the solution.
3 Apply the changes.
Setting up Device Quotas
Notes:
• This application is supported only in some printer models. For more information, see
“Supported
applications” on page 20.
• You may need administrative rights to access the application.
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
2 Click Apps > Device Quotas > Configure.
3 In the User Accounts section, add or edit a user, and then set the user quota.
4 Apply the changes.
Note: For information on how to
configure
the application and its security settings, see the Device
Quotas Administrator’s Guide.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 22
Using QR Code Generator
Notes:
• This application is supported only in some printer models. For more information, see
“Supported
applications” on page 20.
• You may need administrative rights to access the application.
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
2 Click Apps > QR Code Generator > Configure.
3 Do either of the following:
• Select a default QR code value.
• Type a QR code value.
4 Apply the changes.
Configuring Eco
‑Settings
Note: This application is supported only in some printer models. For more information, see
“Supported
applications” on page 20.
1 From the home screen, touch Eco‑Settings.
2 Configure the Eco‑Mode settings or schedule a power-saving mode.
Using Customer Support
Note: This application is supported only in some printer models. For more information, see
“Supported
applications” on page 20.
1 From the home screen, touch Customer Support.
2 Print or e‑mail the information.
Note: For information on
configuring
the application settings, see the Customer Support Administrator’s
Guide.
Creating a Cloud Connector profile
Note: This application is available only in certain country or region. For more information, contact your
Lexmark representative.
1 From the home screen, touch Cloud Connector.
2 Select a cloud service provider.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 23
3 Tou ch Create or .
4 Type a unique profile name.
Note: We recommend creating a PIN to protect the
profile.
5 Tou ch OK, and then take note of the authorization code.
Note: The authorization code is valid only for 24 hours.
6 Open a web browser, and then go to
https://lexmark.cloud-connect.co.
7 Click Next, and then accept the Terms of Use.
8 Enter the authorization code, and then click Connect.
9 Log in to your cloud service provider account.
10 Grant permissions.
Note: To complete the authorization process, open the profile within 72 hours.
Managing bookmarks
Creating bookmarks
Use bookmarks to print frequently accessed documents that are stored in servers or on the web.
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
2 Click Bookmarks > Add Bookmark, and then type a bookmark name.
3 Select an Address protocol type, and then do one of the following:
• For HTTP and HTTPS, type the URL that you want to bookmark.
• For HTTPS, make sure to use the host name instead of the IP address. For example, type
myWebsite.com/sample.pdf instead of typing 123.123.123.123/sample.pdf. Make sure that
the host name also matches the Common Name (CN) value in the server certificate. For more information
on obtaining the CN value in the server certificate, see the help information for your web browser.
• For FTP, type the FTP address. For example, myServer/myDirectory. Enter the FTP port. Port 21 is
the default port for sending commands.
• For SMB, type the network folder address. For example, myServer/myShare/myFile.pdf. Type the
network domain name.
• If necessary, select the Authentication type for FTP and SMB.
To limit access to the bookmark, enter a PIN.
Note: The application supports the following file types: PDF, JPEG, TIFF, and HTML-based web pages.
Other file types such as DOCX and XLXS are supported in some printer models.
4 Click Save.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 24
Creating folders
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
2 Click Bookmarks > Add Folder, and then type a folder name.
Note: To limit access to the folder, enter a PIN.
3 Click Save.
Note: You can create folders or bookmarks inside a folder. To create a bookmark, see
“Creating bookmarks”
on page 24.
Managing contacts
Adding contacts
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
2 Click Address Book.
3 From the Contacts section, add a contact.
Note: You can assign the contact to one or more groups.
4 If necessary, specify a login method to allow application access.
5 Apply the changes.
Adding groups
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
2 Click Address Book.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 25
3 From the Contact Groups section, add a group name.
Note: You can assign one or more contacts to the group.
4 Apply the changes.
Editing contacts or groups
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
2 Click Address Book.
3 Do either of the following:
• From the Contacts section, click a contact name, and then edit the information.
• From the Contact Groups section, click a group name, and then edit the information.
4 Apply the changes.
Deleting contacts or groups
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
2 Click Address Book.
3 Do either of the following:
• From the Contacts section, select a contact that you want to delete.
• From the Contact Groups section, select a group name that you want to delete.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 26
Setting up and using the accessibility features
Enabling Magnification mode
1 From the control panel, press and hold the 5 key until you hear a voice message.
2 Select
Magnification
mode.
3 Select OK.
For more information on navigating a magnified screen, see
“Navigating the screen using gestures” on
page 27.
Activating Voice Guidance
From the control panel
1 Press and hold the 5 key until you hear a voice message.
2 Select OK.
From the keyboard
1 Press and hold the 5 key until you hear a voice message.
2 Press Tab to navigate the focus cursor to the OK button, and then press Enter.
Notes:
• Voice Guidance is also activated when you insert headphones into the headphone jack.
• To adjust the volume, use the volume buttons at the bottom part of the control panel.
Adjusting the Voice Guidance speech rate
1 From the home screen, select Settings > Device > Accessibility > Speech Rate.
2 Select the speech rate.
Navigating the screen using gestures
Notes:
• The gestures are applicable only when Voice Guidance is activated.
• Enable Magnification to use the zoom and pan gestures.
• Use a physical keyboard to type characters and adjust certain settings.
Gesture Function
Double‑tap Select an option or item on the screen.
Triple‑tap Zoom in or zoom out text and images.
Setting up and using the accessibility features 27
Gesture Function
Swipe right or swipe down Move to the next item on the screen.
Swipe left or swipe up Move to the previous item on the screen.
Pan Access parts of the zoomed image that are beyond the limits of the screen.
Note: This gesture requires the use of two fingers to drag across a zoomed
image.
Swipe up then left Exit an application and return to the home screen.
Swipe down then left
• Cancel a job.
• Go back to the previous setting.
• Exit the screen that appears without changing any setting or value.
Swipe up then down Repeat a spoken prompt.
Using the keyboard on the display
Do one or more of the following:
• Drag a finger over the key to announce the character.
• Lift the finger to enter or type the character in the field.
• Select Backspace to delete characters.
• To hear the content in the input
field,
select Tab, and then select Shift + Tab.
Enabling spoken passwords or personal identification
numbers
1 From the home screen, select Settings > Device > Accessibility > Speak Passwords/PINs.
2 Enable the setting.
Setting up and using the accessibility features 28
Loading paper and specialty media
Setting the size and type of the specialty media
The trays automatically detect the size of plain paper. For specialty media like labels, card stock, or envelopes,
do the following:
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type > select a paper source
2 Set the size and type of the specialty media.
Configuring Universal paper settings
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Paper > Media Configuration > Universal Setup.
2 Configure the settings.
Loading the 550‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1 Remove the tray.
Note: To avoid paper jams, do not remove trays while the printer is busy.
2 Adjust the guides to match the size of the paper that you are loading.
Note: Use the indicators on the bottom of the tray to position the guides.
Loading paper and specialty media 29
3 Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.
4 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown, and then make sure that the side guides fit snugly
against the paper.
Loading paper and specialty media 30
• Do not slide paper into the tray.
• To avoid paper jams, make sure that the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Load letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not.
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
One‑sided printing
One‑sided printing
Two‑sided printing
Two‑sided printing
• When loading prepunched paper, make sure that the holes on the long edge of the paper are against
the right side of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
Loading paper and specialty media 31
• Load envelopes with the flap side up and against the left side of the tray.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated
linings, or self‑stick adhesives.
5 Insert the tray.
6 From the control panel, set the paper size and paper type to match the paper loaded.
Loading the 2100
‑sheet tray
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1 Pull out the tray.
2 Adjust the guides.
Loading A5
‑size paper
a Pull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5.
Loading paper and specialty media 32
b Squeeze and slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place.
c Remove the A5 length guide from its holder.
d Insert the guide into its designated slot, and then press until it clicks into place.
Loading paper and specialty media 33
Loading A4‑, letter‑, legal‑, Oficio‑, and folio‑size paper
a Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
b If the A5 length guide is still attached, then remove it. If the guide is not attached, then proceed to step
d on page 35.
c Place the A5 length guide in its holder.
Loading paper and specialty media 34
d Squeeze, and then slide the length guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
3 Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.
4 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.
• Load letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not.
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
One‑sided printing One‑sided printing
Loading paper and specialty media 35
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
Two‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
• When loading prepunched paper, make sure that the holes on the long edge of the paper are against
the right side of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
5 Insert the tray.
Note: Press down the paper stack while inserting the tray.
6 From the control panel, set the paper size and paper type to match the paper loaded.
Loading paper and specialty media 36
Loading the multipurpose feeder
1 Open the multipurpose feeder.
2 Adjust the guide to match the size of the paper that you are loading.
3 Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.
4 Load paper with the printable side faceup.
• Load letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not.
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
One‑sided printing One‑sided printing
Loading paper and specialty media 37
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
Two‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
• When loading prepunched paper, make sure that the holes on the long edge of the paper are against
the right side of the paper guide.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
• Load envelopes with the flap side down and against the left side of the paper guide.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated
linings, or self‑stick adhesives.
5 From the control panel, set the paper size and paper type to match the paper loaded.
Linking trays
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > select a paper source.
2 Set the same paper size and paper type for the trays that you are linking.
3 From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Maintenance > Configuration Menu > Tray Configuration
> Tray Linking.
4 Tou ch Automatic.
To unlink trays, make sure that no trays have the same paper size and paper type settings.
Warning—Potential Damage: The temperature of the fuser varies according to the
specified
paper type. To
avoid printing issues, match the paper type setting in the printer with the paper loaded in the tray.
Loading paper and specialty media 38
Paper support
Supported paper sizes
Paper sizes supported by the printer
Paper size Standard or
optional 550
‑sheet
tray
Optional
2100
‑sheet tray
Multipurpose feeder Two
‑sided
printing
A4
210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 in.)
A5 LEF
1
210 x 148 mm (8.3 x 5.8 in.)
A5 SEF
148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in.)
X X
A6
105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 in.)
X
JIS B5
182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.)
X
Oficio (Mexico)
216 x 340 mm (8.5 x 13.4 in.)
Statement
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in.)
X
Executive
184 x 267 mm (7.3 x 10.5 in.)
X
Letter
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.)
Folio
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in.)
Universal
105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 in.) to
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.)
X
7 3/4 Envelope (Monarch)
3
98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in.)
X X
1
A5 long edge feed (LEF) is recommended over A5 short edge feed (SEF).
2
Envelopes wider than 101.6 mm (4.5 in.) may crease. This paper type must be tested for acceptability.
Paper support 39
Paper size Standard or
optional 550
‑sheet
tray
Optional
2100‑sheet tray
Multipurpose feeder Two
‑sided
printing
9 Envelope
98 x 225 mm (3.9 x 8.9 in.)
X X
10 Envelope
2
105 x 241 mm (4.1 x 9.5 in.)
X X
DL Envelope
2
110 x 220 mm (4.3 x 8.7 in.)
X X
C5 Envelope
2
162 x 229 mm (6.4 x 9 in.)
X X
B5 Envelope
2
176 x 250 mm (6.9 x 9.8 in.)
X X
Other Envelope
2
98.4 x 162 mm (3.9 x 6.4 in.) to
176 x 250 mm (6.9 x 9.8 in.)
X X
1
A5 long edge feed (LEF) is recommended over A5 short edge feed (SEF).
2
Envelopes wider than 101.6 mm (4.5 in.) may crease. This paper type must be tested for acceptability.
Paper sizes supported by the output options or finishers
Paper size Oset stacker 4‑bin mailbox Staple finisher Staple, hole punch finisher
Stack Staple Stack Staple Hole
punch
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
A5 LEF
210 x 148 mm
(8.3 x 5.8 in.)
X
A5 SEF
148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 in.)
X XX
A6
105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)
XXXXX
JIS B5
182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)
X XX
Oficio (Mexico)
216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
Paper support 40
Paper size Oset stacker 4‑bin mailbox Staple finisher Staple, hole punch finisher
Stack Staple Stack Staple Hole
punch
Statement
140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
X XX
Executive
184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)
X XX
Letter
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
X
Folio
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
Universal
105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.) to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
XXXXX
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)
X XXXXX
9 Envelope
98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)
X XXXXX
10 Envelope
105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)
X XXXXX
DL Envelope
110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)
X XXXXX
C5 Envelope
162 x 229 mm
(6.4 x 9 in.)
X XXXXX
B5 Envelope
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
X XXXXX
Paper support 41
Paper size Oset stacker 4‑bin mailbox Staple finisher Staple, hole punch finisher
Stack Staple Stack Staple Hole
punch
Other Envelopes
98.4 x 162 mm
(3.9 x 6.4 in.) to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
X XXXXX
Supported paper types
Paper types supported by the printer
Paper type Standard or
optional 550
‑sheet
tray
Optional
2100‑sheet tray
Multipurpose feeder Two
‑sided printing
Plain paper
Card stock X
Transparency
1
X X
Labels
X X
Bond
Envelope X X
Rough envelope
X X
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored paper X
Light X
Heavy X
Rough/Cotton X
Custom type [x] X
1
To prevent transparencies from sticking together, print up to 20 pages only. Print the succeeding pages after three
minutes.
Paper support 42
Paper types supported by the output options or finishers
Paper type Oset stacker 4‑bin
mailbox
Staple finisher Staple, hole punch finisher
Stack Staple Stack Staple Hole punch
Plain paper
Card stock XXXXXX
Transparencies
X X XX
Labels
XXXXXX
Bond
Envelope XXXXXX
Rough
envelope
XXXXXX
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored paper XXXXXX
Light
XXXXXX
Heavy
XXXXXX
Rough/Cotton
XXXXXX
Custom type [x]
XXXXXX
Supported paper weights
Paper weights supported by the printer
Paper type and weight Standard or
optional
550
‑sheet tray
Optional
2100
‑sheet
tray
Multipurpose feeder Two
‑sided printing
Plain paper or Bond
1
60–176 g/m
²
grain long
(16–47‑lb bond)
1
Grain short is preferred for paper over 176 g/m
²
(47 lb).
2
Pressure‑sensitive area must enter the printer first.
3
28‑lb bond envelopes are limited to 25% cotton content.
Paper support 43
Paper type and weight Standard or
optional
550
‑sheet tray
Optional
2100
‑sheet
tray
Multipurpose feeder Two
‑sided printing
Card stock
203 g/m
²
grain long (125‑lb
bond)
X
Card stock
199 g/m
²
grain long (110‑lb
bond)
X
Card stock
176 g/m
²
grain long (65‑lb
bond)
X
Transparency
138–146 g/m
²
grain long
(37–39‑lb bond)
X X
Paper labels
180 g/m
²
(48‑lb bond)
X
Integrated forms
2
140–175 g/m
²
(37–47‑lb
bond)
X
Integrated forms
75–135 g/m
²
(20–36‑lb
bond)
X
Envelopes
3
60–105 g/m
²
(16–28‑lb
bond)
X
1
Grain short is preferred for paper over 176 g/m
²
(47 lb).
2
Pressure‑sensitive area must enter the printer first.
3
28‑lb bond envelopes are limited to 25% cotton content.
Paper weights supported by the output options or finishers
Paper type and
weight
Oset stacker 4‑bin
mailbox
Staple finisher Staple, hole punch finisher
Stack Staple Stack Staple Hole punch
Plain paper or
Bond
60–176 g/m
²
grain long (16–
47‑lb bond)
X X XX
Plain paper or
Bond
60–90 g/m
²
grain long (16–
24‑lb bond)
Paper support 44
Paper type and
weight
Oset stacker 4‑bin
mailbox
Staple finisher Staple, hole punch finisher
Stack Staple Stack Staple Hole punch
Card stock
203 g/m
²
grain
long (125‑lb
bond)
X X XX
Card stock
199 g/m
²
grain
long (110‑lb
bond)
X X XX
Card stock
176 g/m
²
grain
long (65‑lb
bond)
XXXXXX
Card stock
163 g/m
²
grain
long (90‑lb
bond)
X X XX
Transparency
138–146 g/m
²
grain long (37–
39‑lb bond)
X X XX
Paper labels
180 g/m
²
(48‑lb
bond)
XXXXXX
Integrated forms
140–175 g/m
²
(37–47‑lb bond)
XXXXXX
Integrated forms
75–135 g/m
²
(20–36‑lb bond)
XXXXXX
Envelopes
60–105 g/m
²
(16–28‑lb bond)
XXXXXX
Paper support 45
Printing
Printing from a computer
Note: For labels, card stock, and envelopes, set the paper size and type in the printer before printing the
document.
1 From the document that you are trying to print, open the Print dialog.
2 If necessary, adjust the settings.
3 Print the document.
Printing from a mobile device
Printing from a mobile device using Lexmark Mobile Print
Lexmark
TM
Mobile Print allows you to send documents and images directly to a supported Lexmark printer.
1 Open the document, and then send or share the document to Lexmark Mobile Print.
Note: Some third‑party applications may not support the send or share feature. For more information, see
the documentation that came with the application.
2 Select a printer.
3 Print the document.
Printing from a mobile device using Mopria Print Service
Mopria
®
Print Service is a mobile printing solution for mobile devices running on Android
TM
version 5.0 or later.
It allows you to print directly to any Mopria‑certified printer.
Note: Make sure that you download the Mopria Print Service application from the Google Play
TM
store and
enable it in the mobile device.
1 From your Android mobile device, launch a compatible application or select a document from your
file
manager.
2 Tap
> Print.
3 Select a printer, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
4 Tap
.
Printing from a mobile device using AirPrint
The AirPrint software feature is a mobile printing solution that allows you to print directly from Apple devices
to an AirPrint‑certified printer.
Printing 46
Notes:
• Make sure that the Apple device and the printer are connected to the same network. If the network has
multiple wireless hubs, then make sure that both devices are connected to the same subnet.
• This application is supported only in some Apple devices.
1 From your mobile device, select a document from your
file
manager or launch a compatible application.
2 Tap
> Print.
3 Select a printer, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
4 Print the document.
Printing from a mobile device using Wi
‑Fi Direct®
Wi‑Fi Direct
®
is a printing service that lets you print to any Wi‑Fi Direct‑ready printer.
Note: Make sure that the mobile device is connected to the printer wireless network. For more information,
see
“Connecting a mobile device to the printer” on page 169.
1 From your mobile device, launch a compatible application or select a document from your
file
manager.
2 Depending on your mobile device, do one of the following:
• Tap > Print.
• Tap
> Print.
• Tap
> Print.
3 Select a printer, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
4 Print the document.
Printing from a flash drive
1 Insert the flash drive.
Printing 47
Notes:
• If you insert the flash drive when an error message appears, then the printer ignores the flash drive.
• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears on the
display.
2 From the display, touch the document that you want to print.
If necessary, configure other print settings.
3 Send the print job.
To print another document, touch USB Drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch the flash drive or
the printer in the area shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device.
Supported flash drives and file types
Flash drives
• Lexar JumpDrive S70 (16GB and 32GB)
• SanDisk Cruzer (16GB and 32GB)
• PNY Attache (16GB and 32GB)
Notes:
– The printer supports high‑speed USB flash drives with full‑speed standard.
– USB
flash
drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system.
File types
Documents
• PDF (version 1.7 or earlier)
• HTML
Printing 48
• XPS
• Microsoft file formats (.doc, .docx, .xls, .xlsx, .ppt, .pptx)
Images
• .dcx
• .gif
• .JPEG or .jpg
• .bmp
• .pcx
• .TIFF or .tif
• .png
Configuring confidential jobs
1 From the control panel, navigate to:
Settings > Security >
Confidential
Print Setup
2 Configure the settings.
Use To
Max Invalid PIN Set the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name are deleted.
Confidential Job
Expiration
Set the expiration time for confidential print jobs.
Note: Confidential held jobs are stored in the printer until they are released or
deleted manually.
Repeat Job Expiration Set the expiration time for a repeat print job.
Note: Repeat held jobs are stored in the printer memory for reprinting.
Verify Job Expiration Set the expiration time that the printer prints a copy before printing the remaining
copies.
Note: Verify jobs print one copy to check if it is satisfactory before printing the
remaining copies.
Reserve Job Expiration Set the expiration time that the printer stores print jobs.
Note: Reserve held jobs are automatically deleted after printing.
Require All Jobs to be
Held
Set the printer to hold all print jobs.
Keep duplicate
documents
Set the printer to print all documents with the same file name.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
For Windows users
1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Select a printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
Printing 49
3 Click Print and Hold.
4 Select Use Print and Hold, and then assign a user name.
5 Select the print job type
(Confidential,
Repeat, Reserve, or Verify).
If you select Confidential, then secure the print job with a personal identification number (PIN).
6 Click OK or Print.
7 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For
confidential
print jobs, touch Held jobs > select your user name >
Confidential
> enter the PIN >
select the print job >
configure
the settings > Print.
• For other print jobs, touch Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > configure the settings
> Print.
For Macintosh users
Using AirPrint
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
2 Select a printer, and then from the drop-down menu following the Orientation menu, choose PIN Printing.
3 Enable Print with PIN, and then enter a four‑digit PIN.
4 Click Print.
5 From the printer home screen, release the print job. Touch Held jobs > select your computer name >
Confidential > enter the PIN > select the print job > Print.
Using the print driver
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
2 Select a printer, and then from the drop-down menu following the Orientation menu, choose Print and Hold.
3 Choose Confidential Print, and then enter a four‑digit PIN.
4 Click Print.
5 From the printer home screen, release the print job. Touch Held jobs > select your computer name >
Confidential > select the print job > enter the PIN > Print.
Printing from a Cloud Connector profile
1 From the home screen, touch Cloud Connector.
2 Select a cloud service provider, and then select a
profile.
Note: For more information on creating a Cloud Connector profile, see
“Creating a Cloud Connector
profile” on page 23.
3 Tou ch Print, and then select a file.
If necessary, change the settings.
Note: Make sure to select a supported file.
4 Print the document.
Printing 50
Printing a font sample list
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Reports > Print > Print Fonts.
2 To uc h PCL Fonts or PS Fonts.
Printing a directory list
From the home screen, touch Settings > Reports > Print > Print Directory.
Canceling a print job
From the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, touch Job Queue.
Note: You can also access this setting by touching the top section of the home screen.
2 Select the job to cancel.
From the computer
1 Depending on the operating system, do either of the following:
• Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
• From the System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer.
2 Select the job to cancel.
Printing 51
Copying
Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
• Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided
documents.
• Load an original document faceup. For multiple‑page
documents, make sure to align the leading edge
before loading.
• Make sure to adjust the ADF guides to match the width
of the paper that you are loading.
• Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents,
book pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media
(such as magazine clippings).
• Place the document facedown in the corner with the
arrow.
Making copies
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the original document and output have the same paper
size.
2 From the home screen, touch Copy, and then specify the number of copies.
If necessary, adjust the copy settings.
3 Copy the document.
Note: To make a quick copy, from the control panel, press
.
Copying photos
1 Place a photo on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, touch Copy > Content > Content Type > Photo.
3 Tou ch Content Source, and then select the setting that best matches the original photo.
4 Copy the photo.
Copying 52
Copying on letterhead
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, touch Copy > Copy From > select the size of the original document.
3 Tou ch Copy To, and then select the paper source that contains the letterhead.
If you loaded the letterhead into the multipurpose feeder, then navigate to:
Copy To > Multipurpose Feeder > select a paper size > Letterhead
4 Copy the document.
Copying on both sides of the paper
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, touch Copy > Sides.
3 Adjust the settings.
4 Copy the document.
Reducing or enlarging copies
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Scale > specify a scale value
Note: Changing the size of the original document or output after setting Scale restores the scale value to
Auto.
3 Copy the document.
Collating copies
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, touch Copy > Collate > On [1,2,1,2,1,2].
3 Copy the document.
Placing separator sheets between copies
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, touch Copy > Separator Sheets.
3 Adjust the settings.
4 Send the copy job.
Copying 53
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, touch Copy > Pages per Side.
3 Adjust the settings.
4 Copy the document.
Creating a copy shortcut
1 From the home screen, touch Copy.
2 Configure the settings, and then touch
.
3 Create a shortcut.
Copying 54
E-mailing
Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
• Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided
documents.
• Load an original document faceup. For multiple‑page
documents, make sure to align the leading edge
before loading.
• Make sure to adjust the ADF guides to match the width
of the paper that you are loading.
• Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents,
book pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media
(such as magazine clippings).
• Place the document facedown in the corner with the
arrow.
Configuring the e‑mail SMTP settings
Configure the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) settings to send a scanned document through e-mail. The
settings vary with each e‑mail service provider.
Before you begin, make sure that the printer is connected to a network and that the network is connected to
the Internet.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > E
‑mail.
3 From the E‑mail Setup section,
configure
the settings.
Notes:
• For more information on the password, see the list of
e‑mail service providers.
• For e‑mail service providers that are not on the list, contact your provider and ask for the settings.
4 Click Save.
E-mailing 55
Using the Settings menu in the printer
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > E‑mail > E‑mail Setup.
2 Configure the settings.
Notes:
• For more information on the password, see the list of
e‑mail service providers.
• For e‑mail service providers that are not on the list, contact your provider and ask for the settings.
E
‑mail service providers
•
AOL Mail
• Comcast Mail
• Gmail
• iCloud Mail
• Mail.com
• NetEase Mail (mail.126.com)
• NetEase Mail (mail.163.com)
• NetEase Mail (mail.yeah.net)
• Outlook Live or Microsoft 365
• QQ Mail
• Sina Mail
• Sohu Mail
• Yah o o ! M a i l
• Zoho Mail
Notes:
• If you encounter errors using the settings provided, then contact your e‑mail service provider.
• For e‑mail service providers that are not on the list, contact your provider.
AOL Mail
Setting Value
Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.aol.com
Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587
Use SSL/TLS Required
Require Trusted Certificate Disabled
Reply Address You r e‑mail address
SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain
Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials
Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address
E-mailing 56
Setting Value
Device Password App password
Note: To create an app password, go to the
AOL Account Security page, log
in to your account, and then click Generate app password.
Comcast Mail
Setting Value
Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.comcast.net
Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587
Use SSL/TLS Required
Require Trusted Certificate Disabled
Reply Address You r e‑mail address
SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain
Device
‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials
Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address
Device Password Account password
Gmail
TM
Note: Make sure that two‑step
verification
is enabled on your Google account. To enable two‑step
verification,
go to the
Google Account Security page, log in to your account, and then from the “Signing in to
Google” section, click 2
‑Step Verification.
Setting Value
Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.gmail.com
Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587
Use SSL/TLS Required
Require Trusted Certificate Disabled
Reply Address You r e‑mail address
SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain
Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials
Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address
Device Password App password
Notes:
• To create an app password, go to the Google Account Security page, log
in to your account, and then from the “Signing in to Google” section, click
App passwords.
• “App passwords” shows only if two‑step verification is enabled.
E-mailing 57
iCloud Mail
Note: Make sure that two‑step verification is enabled on your account.
Setting Value
Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.mail.me.com
Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587
Use SSL/TLS Required
Require Trusted Certificate Disabled
Reply Address You r e‑mail address
SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain
Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials
Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address
Device Password App password
Note: To create an app password, go to the
iCloud Account Management
page, log in to your account, and then from the Security section, click
Generate Password.
Mail.com
Setting Value
Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.mail.com
Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587
Use SSL/TLS Required
Require Trusted Certificate Disabled
Reply Address You r e‑mail address
SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain
Device
‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials
Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address
Device Password Account password
NetEase Mail (mail.126.com)
Note: Make sure that the SMTP service is enabled on your account. To enable the service, from the NetEase
Mail home page, click Settings > POP3/SMTP/IMAP, and then enable either IMAP/SMTP service or
POP3/SMTP service.
Setting Value
Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.126.com
Primary SMTP Gateway Port 465
Use SSL/TLS Required
Require Trusted Certificate Disabled
E-mailing 58
Setting Value
Reply Address You r e‑mail address
SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain
Device
‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials
Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address
Device Password Authorization password
Note: The authorization password is provided when IMAP/SMTP service or
POP3/SMTP service is enabled.
NetEase Mail (mail.163.com)
Note: Make sure that the SMTP service is enabled on your account. To enable the service, from the NetEase
Mail home page, click Settings > POP3/SMTP/IMAP, and then enable either IMAP/SMTP service or
POP3/SMTP service.
Setting Value
Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.163.com
Primary SMTP Gateway Port 465
Use SSL/TLS Required
Require Trusted Certificate Disabled
Reply Address You r e‑mail address
SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain
Device
‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials
Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address
Device Password Authorization password
Note: The authorization password is provided when IMAP/SMTP service or
POP3/SMTP service is enabled.
NetEase Mail (mail.yeah.net)
Note: Make sure that the SMTP service is enabled on your account. To enable the service, from the NetEase
Mail home page, click Settings > POP3/SMTP/IMAP, and then enable either IMAP/SMTP service or
POP3/SMTP service.
Setting Value
Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.yeah.net
Primary SMTP Gateway Port 465
Use SSL/TLS Required
Require Trusted Certificate Disabled
Reply Address You r e‑mail address
SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain
E-mailing 59
Setting Value
Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials
Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address
Device Password Authorization password
Note: The authorization password is provided when IMAP/SMTP service or
POP3/SMTP service is enabled.
Outlook Live or Microsoft 365
These settings apply to outlook.com and hotmail.com e‑mail domains, and Microsoft 365 accounts.
Setting Value
Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.oce365.com
Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587
Use SSL/TLS Required
Require Trusted Certificate Disabled
Reply Address You r e‑mail address
SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain
Device
‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials
Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address
Device Password Account password or app password
Notes:
• For accounts with two‑step verification disabled, use your account
password.
• For outlook.com or hotmail.com accounts with two‑step
verification
enabled, use an app password. To create an app password, go to the
Outlook Live Account Management page, and then log in to your
account.
Note: For additional setup options for business using Microsoft 365, go to the Microsoft 365 help page.
QQ Mail
Note: Make sure that the SMTP service is enabled on your account. To enable the service, from the QQ Mail
home page, click Settings > Account. From the POP3/IMAP/SMTP/Exchange/CardDAV/CalDAV Service
section, enable either POP3/SMTP service or IMAP/SMTP service.
Setting Value
Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.qq.com
Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587
Use SSL/TLS Required
Require Trusted Certificate Disabled
Reply Address You r e‑mail address
E-mailing 60
Setting Value
SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain
Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials
Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address
Device Password Authorization code
Note: To generate an authorization code, from the QQ Mail home page, click
Settings > Account, and then from the
POP3/IMAP/SMTP/Exchange/CardDAV/CalDAV Service section, click
Generate authorization code.
Sina Mail
Note: Make sure that the POP3/SMTP service is enabled on your account. To enable the service, from the
Sina Mail home page, click Settings > More settings > User
‑end POP/IMAP/SMTP, and then enable
POP3/SMTP service.
Setting Value
Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.sina.com
Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587
Use SSL/TLS Required
Require Trusted Certificate Disabled
Reply Address You r e‑mail address
SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain
Device
‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials
Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address
Device Password Authorization code
Note: To create an authorization code, from the e‑mail home page, click
Settings > More settings > User
‑end POP/IMAP/SMTP, and then enable
Authorization code status.
Sohu Mail
Note: Make sure that the SMTP service is enabled on your account. To enable the service, from the Sohu
Mail home page, click Options > Settings > POP3/SMTP/IMAP, and then enable either IMAP/SMTP service
or POP3/SMTP service.
Setting Value
Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.sohu.com
Primary SMTP Gateway Port 465
Use SSL/TLS Required
Require Trusted Certificate Disabled
Reply Address You r e‑mail address
SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain
E-mailing 61
Setting Value
Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials
Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address
Device Password Independent password
Note: The independent password is provided when IMAP/SMTP service or
POP3/SMTP service is enabled.
Yaho o! M ai l
Setting Value
Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.mail.yahoo.com
Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587
Use SSL/TLS Required
Require Trusted Certificate Disabled
Reply Address You r e‑mail address
SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain
Device
‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials
Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address
Device Password App password
Note: To create an app password, go to the
Yahoo Account Security page,
log in to your account, and then click Generate app password.
Zoho Mail
Setting Value
Primary SMTP Gateway smtp.zoho.com
Primary SMTP Gateway Port 587
Use SSL/TLS Required
Require Trusted Certificate Disabled
Reply Address You r e‑mail address
SMTP Server Authentication Login / Plain
Device‑Initiated E‑mail Use Device SMTP Credentials
Device UserID Yo ur e‑mail address
E-mailing 62
Setting Value
Device Password Account password or app password
Notes:
• For accounts with two‑step verification disabled, use your account
password.
• For accounts with two‑step verification enabled, use an app password. To
create an app password, go to the
Zoho Mail Account Security page, log
in to your account, and then from the Application‑Specific Passwords
section, click Generate New Password.
Sending an e-mail
Before you begin, make sure that the SMTP settings are configured. For more information, see
“Configuring
the e‑mail SMTP settings” on page 55.
Using the control panel
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, touch E-mail, and then enter the needed information.
3 If necessary, configure the output file type settings.
4 Send the e-mail.
Using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, touch Shortcut Center > E
‑mail.
3 Select the shortcut number.
4 Send the e‑mail.
Creating an e-mail shortcut
1 From the home screen, touch E
‑mail.
2
Configure
the settings, and then touch
.
3 Create a shortcut.
E-mailing 63
Faxing
Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
• Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided
documents.
• Load an original document faceup. For multiple‑page
documents, make sure to align the leading edge
before loading.
• Make sure to adjust the ADF guides to match the width
of the paper that you are loading.
• Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents,
book pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media
(such as magazine clippings).
• Place the document facedown in the corner with the
arrow.
Setting up the printer to fax
Notes:
• The following connection methods are applicable only in some countries or regions.
• During the initial printer setup, clear the fax function check box and any other function that you plan to
set up later, and then select Continue.
• If the fax function is enabled and not fully set up, then the indicator light may blink red.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch cables or the printer
in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax.
Faxing 64
Supported fax
Printer model Analog fax
etherFAX
1
Fax server
Fax over IP (FoIP)
2
MX822ade
MX822adtfe
MX822adxe
MX822de X
MX826ade
MX826adtfe
MX826adxe
MX826de X
XM7355
XM7335b
XM7335bi X
XM7335i X
XM7370
XM7370i X
1
Needs a subscription. For more information, go to
https://www.etherfax.net/lexmark or contact the place where
you purchased the printer.
2
Needs an installed license bundle. For more information, contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Setting up the fax function using analog fax
Notes:
• This feature is available only in some printer models.
• Some connection methods are applicable only in some countries or regions.
• If the fax function is enabled and not fully set up, then the indicator light may blink red.
• If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then use the control panel to set up fax.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch cables or the printer
in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax.
Faxing 65
Using the Settings menu in the printer
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > General Fax settings.
2
Configure
the settings.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > General Fax Settings.
3
Configure
the settings.
4 Apply the changes.
Setting up the fax function using etherFAX
Notes:
• The printer firmware must be updated to the latest version. For more information, see
“Updating
firmware” on page 318.
• An appropriate license bundle must be installed in your printer. For more information, contact etherFAX.
• Make sure that you have registered your printer to the etherFAX portal. For more information, go to
https://www.etherfax.net/lexmark.
• The printer serial number is required on registration. To locate the serial number, see
“Finding the printer
serial number” on page 11.
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Faxing 66
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > General Fax Settings.
Note: Fax Setup appears only if Fax Mode is set to Fax.
3 In the Fax Name field, type a unique name.
4 In the Fax Number
field,
enter the fax number that etherFAX provided.
5 From the Fax Transport menu, select etherFAX.
6 Apply the changes.
Setting up the fax function using fax server
Notes:
• This feature lets you send fax messages to a fax service provider that supports e‑mail receiving.
• This feature supports outgoing fax messages only. To support fax receive, make sure that you have a
device‑based fax, such as analog fax, etherFAX, or Fax over IP (FoIP), configured in your printer.
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address
field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax.
3 From the Fax Mode menu, select Fax Server, and then click Save.
4 Click Fax Server Setup.
5 In the To Format field, type [#]@myfax.com, where [#] is the fax number and myfax.com is the fax
provider domain.
Notes:
• If necessary, configure the Reply Address, Subject, or Message fields.
• To let the printer receive fax messages, enable the device‑based fax receive setting. Make sure that
you have a device‑based fax configured.
6 Click Save.
7 Click Fax Server E
‑mail Settings, and then do either of the following:
• Enable Use E
‑mail SMTP Server.
Note: If the E‑mail SMTP settings are not
configured,
then see
“Configuring
the e‑mail SMTP settings”
on page 55.
• Configure the SMTP settings. For more information, contact your e‑mail service provider.
8 Apply the changes.
Faxing 67
Setting up fax using a standard telephone line
Note: These instructions apply only to printers that support analog fax. For more information, see “Supported
fax” on page 65.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of
fire,
use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
Notes:
• You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (set Auto Answer to On) or manually (set Auto
Answer to O).
• If you want to receive faxes automatically, then set the printer to pick up on a specified number of rings.
Faxing 68
Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine
Note: If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then make sure that you set the correct ring pattern for
the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive faxes
automatically.
Connected to the same telephone wall jack
Note: These instructions apply only to printers that have EXT and line ports.
• Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
• Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.
• Connect the answering machine to the telephone port of the printer.
Faxing 69
Connected to dierent wall jacks
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to an active analog wall jack.
Notes:
• If you have only one telephone number on your line, then set the printer to receive faxes automatically.
• Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering
machine picks up calls after four rings, then set the printer Rings to Answer setting to 6.
Setting up fax in countries or regions with
dierent
telephone wall jacks
and plugs
Note: These instructions apply only to printers that support analog fax. For more information, see
“Supported
fax” on page 65.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not set up this product or make
any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord, fax feature, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not use the fax feature during a
lightning storm.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a 26 AWG or larger
telecommunications (RJ-11) cord when connecting this product to the public switched telephone
network. For users in Australia, the cord must be approved by the Australian Communications and Media
Authority.
Faxing 70
The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ‑11. If the wall jack or equipment in your facility
is not compatible with this type of connection, then use a telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or
region may not come with your printer, and you may need to purchase it separately.
There may be an adapter plug installed in the telephone port of the printer. Do not remove the adapter plug
from the telephone port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded telephone system.
Part name Part number
Lexmark adapter plug 40X8519
Connecting the printer to a non‑RJ‑11 wall jack
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable to the line port of the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.
3 If you want to connect another device with a non‑RJ‑11 connector to the same wall jack, then connect it
directly to the telephone adapter.
Faxing 71
Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service lets you have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line. Each telephone
number is assigned a dierent ring pattern.
Note: These instructions apply only to printers that support analog fax. For more information, see
“Supported
fax” on page 65.
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings > Admin Controls >
Answer On.
2 Select a ring pattern.
Setting the fax date and time
Note: Make sure that fax is configured. For more information, see
“Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Preferences > Date and Time >
Configure
.
2 Configure the settings.
Configuring
daylight saving time
Note: Make sure that fax is configured. For more information, see
“Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Preferences > Date and Time >
Configure
.
2 In the Time Zone menu, select (UTC+user) Custom.
3 Configure the settings.
Sending a fax
Note: Make sure that fax is
configured.
For more information, see
“Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.
Using the control panel
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the needed information.
If necessary, adjust the settings.
3 Send the fax.
Using the computer
Before you begin, make sure that the fax driver is installed. For more information, see “Installing the fax driver”
on page 316.
For Windows users
1 From the document that you are trying to fax, open the Print dialog.
2 Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
Faxing 72
3 Click Fax > Enable fax > Always display settings prior to faxing, and then enter the recipient number.
If necessary, configure other fax settings.
4 Send the fax.
For Macintosh users
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
2 Select the printer that has
‑ Fax added after its name.
3 In the To
field,
enter the recipient number.
If necessary, configure other fax settings.
4 Send the fax.
Scheduling a fax
Note: Make sure that fax is configured. For more information, see
“Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, touch Fax > To > enter the fax number > Done.
3 Tou ch Send Time, configure the date and time, and then touch OK.
4 Send the fax.
Creating a fax destination shortcut
Note: Make sure that fax is
configured.
For more information, see
“Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.
1 From the home screen, touch Fax > To.
2 Enter the recipient number, and then touch Done.
3 Tou ch
.
4 Create a shortcut.
Changing the fax resolution
Note: Make sure that fax is configured. For more information, see
“Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the needed information.
3 Tou ch Resolution, and then adjust the setting.
4 Send the fax.
Faxing 73
Adjusting the fax darkness
Note: Make sure that fax is
configured.
For more information, see
“Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the needed information.
3 Tou ch Darkness, and then adjust the setting.
4 Send the fax.
Printing a fax log
Note: Make sure that fax is configured. For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Reports > Fax.
2 To uc h Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Blocking junk faxes
Note: Make sure that fax is configured. For more information, see
“Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings > Admin Controls.
2 Set Block No Name Fax to On.
Holding faxes
Note: Make sure that fax is
configured.
For more information, see “Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings > Holding Faxes.
2 Select a mode.
Forwarding a fax
Note: Make sure that fax is
configured.
For more information, see
“Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.
1 Create a destination shortcut.
a From the home screen, touch Shortcut Center.
Note: The icon and name may have been changed. For more information, contact your administrator.
b Select a printer function, and then touch Create Shortcut.
c Configure the settings, and then touch Save.
d Type a unique shortcut name.
e To uc h OK.
Note: Take note of the shortcut number.
2 From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings > Admin Controls.
Faxing 74
3 Tou ch Fax Forwarding and then touch Forward or Print and Forward.
4 Tou ch Forward to, and then select a destination.
5 Select a destination type, and then enter the shortcut number of the destination.
Faxing 75
Scanning
Using the automatic document feeder and scanner glass
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
• Use the ADF for multiple‑page or two-sided
documents.
• Load an original document faceup. For multiple‑page
documents, make sure to align the leading edge
before loading.
• Make sure to adjust the ADF guides to match the width
of the paper that you are loading.
• Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents,
book pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media
(such as magazine clippings).
• Place the document facedown in the corner with the
arrow.
Scanning to a computer
Before you begin, make sure that:
• The printer
firmware
is updated. For more information, see “Updating
firmware”
on page 318.
• The computer and the printer are connected to the same network.
For Windows users
Using Lexmark ScanBack Utility
1 From the computer, run Lexmark ScanBack Utility, and then click Next.
Note: To download the utility, go to
www.lexmark.com/downloads.
2 Click Setup, and then add the printer IP address.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
3 Click Close > Next.
4 Select the size of the original document, and then click Next.
5 Select a
file
format and scan resolution, and then click Next.
6 Type a unique scan profile name, and then click Next.
7 Browse to the location you want to save the scanned document, create a file name, and then click Next.
Note: To reuse the scan profile, enable Create Shortcut, and then create a unique shortcut name.
8 Click Finish.
Scanning 76
9 Load an original document into the automatic document feeder or on the scanner glass.
10 From the printer home screen, touch Scan Profiles, and then select a scan profile.
Note: Make sure that Scan Profiles is enabled. From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Visible
Home Screen Icons > Scan Profiles > Display.
Using Windows Fax and Scan
Note: Make sure that the printer is added to the computer. For more information, see
“Adding printers to a
computer” on page 316.
1 Load an original document into the automatic document feeder or on the scanner glass.
2 From the computer, open Windows Fax and Scan.
3 From the Source menu, select a scanner source.
4 If necessary, change the scan settings.
5 Scan the document.
For Macintosh users
Note: Make sure that the printer is added to the computer. For more information, see “Adding printers to a
computer” on page 316.
1 Load an original document into the automatic document feeder or on the scanner glass.
2 From the computer, do either of the following:
• Open Image Capture.
• Open Printers & Scanners, and then select a printer. Click Scan > Open Scanner.
3 From the Scanner window, do one or more of the following:
• Select where you want to save the scanned document.
• Select the size of the original document.
• To scan from the ADF, select Document Feeder from the Scan Menu or enable Use Document Feeder.
• If necessary, configure the scan settings.
4 Click Scan.
Scanning to an FTP server
1 Load the original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, touch FTP, and then enter the needed information.
3 If necessary, configure other FTP settings.
4 Send the FTP job.
Scanning 77
Scanning to a network folder
1 Load the document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, touch Scan Center.
Note: The icon and name may have been changed. For more information, contact your administrator.
3 Do either of the following:
• Select a destination.
Note: For SFTP, set the port number to 22.
• Use a shortcut by touching
, and then selecting the shortcut from the list.
4 Scan the document.
Creating an FTP shortcut
1 From the home screen, touch FTP.
2 Enter the FTP server address, and then touch .
3 Create a shortcut.
Scanning to a flash drive
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 Insert the flash drive.
3 Tou ch Scan to USB and adjust the settings if necessary.
Notes:
• To save the scanned document to a folder, touch Scan to, select a folder, and then touch Scan Here.
• If the USB Drive screen does not appear, then touch USB Drive on the control panel.
Scanning 78
4 Scan the document.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid loss of data or printer malfunction, do not touch the
flash
drive or
the printer in the area shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device.
Scanning to a Cloud Connector profile
1 Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, touch Cloud Connector.
3 Select a cloud service provider, and then select a profile.
Note: For more information on creating a Cloud Connector
profile,
see
“Creating a Cloud Connector
profile”
on page 23.
4 Tou ch Scan, and then assign a filename and destination folder.
5 Tou ch Scan Here.
If necessary, change the scan settings.
6 Scan the document.
Scanning 79
Understanding the printer menus
Menu map
Device
• Preferences
• Eco‑Mode
• Remote Operator Panel
• Notifications
• Power Management
• Anonymous Data Collection
• Accessibility
• Restore Factory Defaults
• Maintenance
• Visible Home Screen Icons
• About this Printer
Print
•
Layout
• Finishing
• Setup
• Quality
• Job Accounting
• XPS
• PDF
• PostScript
• PCL
• HTML
• Image
Paper
•
Tray Configuration
• Media Configuration
• Bin Configuration
Copy Copy Defaults
Fax Fax Defaults
E‑mail
•
E‑mail Setup
• E‑mail Defaults
• Web Link Setup
FTP FTP Defaults
USB Drive
•
Flash Drive Scan • Flash Drive Print
Network/Ports
•
Network Overview
• Wireless
• Wi‑Fi Direct
• Ethernet
• TCP/IP
• SNMP
• IPSec
• 802.1x
• LPD
Configuration
• HTTP/FTP Settings
• ThinPrint
• USB
• Restrict external network access
Security
• Login Methods
• Schedule USB Devices
• Security Audit Log
• Login Restrictions
• Confidential Print Setup
• Disk Encryption
• Erase Temporary Data Files
• Solutions LDAP Settings
• Miscellaneous
Reports
• Menu Settings Page
• Device
• Print
• Shortcuts
• Fax
• Network
Understanding the printer menus 80
Help
• Print All Guides
• Mono Quality Guide
• Connection Guide
• Copy Guide
• E‑mail Guide
• Fax Guide
• FTP Guide
• Information Guide
• Media Guide
• Moving Guide
• Print Quality Guide
• Supplies Guide
Troubleshooting Print Quality Test Pages Cleaning the scanner
Device
Preferences
Menu item Description
Display Language Set the language of the text that appears on the display.
Country/Region Identify the country or region that the printer is configured to
operate.
Run initial setup
O*
On
Run the setup wizard.
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
Select a language as a keyboard type.
Note: All the Keyboard Type values may not appear or may
require special hardware be installed to appear.
Displayed information
Display Text 1 (IP Address*)
Display Text 2 (Date/Time*)
Custom Text 1
Custom Text 2
Specify the information to appear on the home screen.
Date and Time
Configure
Current Date and Time
Manually Set Date and Time
Date Format (MM‑DD‑YYYY*)
Time Format (12 hour A.M./P.M.*)
Time Zone (UTC‑5:00*)
Network Time Protocol
Enable NTP (On*)
NTP Server
Enable Authentication
Configure the printer date and time and network time protocol.
Paper Sizes
U.S.*
Metric
Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes.
Note: The country or region selected in the initial setup
wizard determines the initial paper size setting.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 81
Menu item Description
Screen Brightness
20–100% (100*)
Adjust the brightness of the display.
Flash Drive Access
Enabled*
Disabled
Enable access to the flash drive.
Allow Background Removal
O
On*
Specify whether background removal is allowed.
Allow Custom Job scans
O
On*
Specify whether the Custom Job Scanning setting appears for
copy, scan, and fax.
Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is
installed.
One Page Flatbed Scanning
O*
On
Set the printer to scan any type of job involving the scanner
glass as a single page.
Note: The printer returns to the home screen after
performing a single flatbed scan instead of displaying
prompts.
Output Lighting
O
On*
Enable the integrated output light or indicator light of an
optional output bin.
Audio Feedback
Button Feedback (On*)
Volume (5*)
• Enable audio feedback for button presses, panel
interactions, paper loaded prompts, and error notifications.
• Adjust the feedback volume.
Screen Timeout
5–300 seconds (60*)
Set the idle time before the display shows the home screen or
before the printer logs out a user account automatically.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Eco-Mode
Menu item Description
Print
Sides
1‑Sided*
2‑Sided
Specify whether to print on one side or two sides of the paper.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 82
Menu item Description
Print
Pages per Side
O*
2 pages per side
3 pages per side
4 pages per side
6 pages per side
9 pages per side
12 pages per side
16 pages per side
Print multiple page images on one side of a sheet of paper.
Print
Toner Darkness
1–10 (8*)
Determine the lightness or darkness of text images.
Copy
Sides
1 sided to 1 sided*
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Specify the scanning behavior based on the original
document.
Copy
Pages per Side
O*
2 Portrait pages
4 Portrait pages
2 Landscape pages
4 Landscape pages
Specify the scanning behavior based on the original
document.
Copy
Darkness
1–9 (5*)
Determine the darkness of the scanned text images.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Remote Operator Panel
Menu item Description
External VNC Connection
Don’t Allow*
Allow
Connect an external Virtual Network Computing (VNC) client
to the remote control panel.
Authentication Type
None*
Standard Authentication
Set the authentication type when accessing the VNC client
server.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 83
Menu item Description
VNC Password Specify the password to connect to the VNC client server.
Note: This menu item appears only if Authentication Type is
set to Standard Authentication.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Notifications
Menu item Description
Error Lighting
O
On*
Set the indicator light to come on when a printer error occurs.
ADF Loaded Beep
O
On*
Enable a sound when loading paper into the ADF.
Alarm Control
O
Single*
Continuous
Set the number of times that the alarm sounds when the printer
requires user intervention.
Supplies
Show Supply Estimates
Show estimates*
Do not show estimates
Show the estimated status of the supplies.
Supplies
Cartridge Alarm
(O*)
Staple Alarm
(O*)
Hole Punch Alarm (O*)
Set the number of times that the alarm sounds when the toner
cartridge is low, the staple cartridge is empty, or the hole punch
receptacle is full or missing.
Note: Staple Alarm and Hole Punch Alarm appear only when
output options are installed.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 84
Menu item Description
E‑mail Alerts Setup
E‑mail Setup
Primary SMTP Gateway
Primary SMTP Gateway Port (25*)
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port (25*)
SMTP Timeout (30 seconds*)
Reply Address
Always use SMTP default Reply
Address(O*)
Use SSL/TLS(Disabled*)
Require Trusted Certificate(On*)
SMTP Server Authentication(No
authentication required*)
Device‑Initiated E‑mail(None*)
User‑Initiated E‑mail(None*)
Use Active Directory Device
Credentials(O*)
Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 REALM
NTLM Domain
Disable "SMTP server not set up"
(O*)
Configure the e‑mail settings of the printer.
E
‑mail Alerts Setup
Setup E-mail Lists and Alerts
E‑mail List 1
E‑mail List 2
E-mail Events
Specify the e‑mail addresses and enable the e‑mail alert
events.
Note: This menu item appears only in the Embedded Web
Server.
Error Prevention
ADF Multifeed Sensor
O
On*
Detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of media at
once.
Error Prevention
Jam Assist
O
On*
Set the printer to flush blank pages or pages with partial prints
automatically after a jammed page has been cleared.
Error Prevention
Auto Continue
O
On* (5 seconds)
Let the printer continue processing or printing a job
automatically after clearing certain printer conditions that
require user intervention.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 85
Menu item Description
Error Prevention
Auto Reboot
Auto Reboot
Reboot when idle
Reboot always*
Reboot never
Set the printer to restart when an error occurs.
Error Prevention
Auto Reboot
Max Auto Reboots
1–20 (2*)
Set the number of automatic reboots that the printer can
perform.
Error Prevention
Auto Reboot
Auto Reboot Window
1–525600 seconds (720*)
Set the time before the printer performs an automatic reboot.
Error Prevention
Auto Reboot
Auto Reboot Counter
Show a read‑only information of the reboot counter.
Error Prevention
Auto Reboot
Reset Auto Reboot Counter
Cancel
Continue
Reset Auto Reboot Counter.
Error Prevention
Display Short Paper Error
On
Auto‑clear*
Set the printer to show a message when a short paper error
occurs.
Note: Short paper refers to the size of the paper loaded.
Error Prevention
Page Protect
O*
On
Set the printer to process the entire page into the memory
before printing it.
Jam Content Recovery
Jam Recovery
O
On
Auto*
Set the printer to reprint jammed pages.
Jam Content Recovery
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Page level*
Specify how to restart a scan job after resolving a paper jam.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 86
Power Management
Menu item Description
Sleep Mode Profile
Print from Sleep Mode
Stay awake after printing
Enter Sleep Mode after printing*
Set the printer to stay in Ready mode or return to Sleep mode
after printing.
Timeouts
Sleep Mode
1–120 minutes (15*)
Set the idle time before the printer begins operating in Sleep
mode.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout
Disabled
1 hour
2 hours
3 hours
6 hours
1 day
2 days
3 days*
1 week
2 weeks
1 month
Set the time before the printer turns o.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout on Connection
Hibernate
Do Not Hibernate*
Set Hibernate Timeout to turn o the printer while an active
Ethernet connection exists.
Schedule Power Modes
Schedules
Add New Schedule
Schedule the printer when to enter Sleep or Hibernate mode.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Anonymous Data Collection
Menu item Description
Anonymous Data Collection
Device Usage and Performance
Information
None*
Send printer usage and performance information to Lexmark.
Note: Anonymous Data Send Time appears only when you set
Anonymous Data Collection to Device Usage and Performance.
Anonymous Data Send Time
Start Time
Stop Time
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 87
Accessibility
Menu item Description
Duplicate Key Strike Interval
0–5 (0*)
Set the interval in seconds during which the printer ignores duplicate key
presses on an attached keyboard.
Key Repeat Initial Delay
0.25–5 (1*)
Set the initial length of delay in seconds before a repeating key starts
repeating.
Note: This menu item appears only when a keyboard is attached to the
printer.
Key Repeat Rate
0.5–30 (30*)
Set the number of presses per second for a repeating key.
Note: This menu item appears only when a keyboard is attached to the
printer.
Prolong Screen Timeout
O*
On
Let the user remain in the same location and reset the Screen Timeout
timer when it expires instead of returning to the home screen.
Headphone Volume
1–10 (5*)
Adjust the headphone volume.
Note: This menu item appears only when a headphone is attached to
the printer.
Enable Voice Guidance When
Headphone Is Attached
O*
On
Enable Voice Guidance when a headphone is attached to the printer.
Speak Passwords/PINs
O*
On
Set the printer to read out loud passwords or personal identification
numbers.
Note: This menu item appears only when a headphone or a speaker is
attached to the printer.
Speech Rate
Very Slow
Slow
Normal*
Fast
Faster
Very Fast
Rapid
Very Rapid
Fastest
Set the Voice Guidance speech rate.
Note: This menu item appears only when a headphone or a speaker is
attached to the printer.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 88
Restore Factory Defaults
Menu item Description
Restore Settings
Restore all settings
Restore printer settings
Restore network settings
Restore fax settings
Restore app settings
Restore the printer factory default settings.
Maintenance
Configuration Menu
Menu item Description
USB Configuration
USB PnP
1*
2
Change the USB driver mode of the printer to improve its
compatibility with a personal computer.
USB Configuration
USB Scan to Local
O
On*
Set whether the USB device driver enumerates as a USB
Simple device (single interface) or as a USB Composite device
(multiple interfaces).
USB Configuration
USB Speed
Full
Auto*
Set the USB port to run at full speed and disable its high‑speed
capabilities.
Tray Configuration
Size Sensing
Tray [x] Sensing
O
On*
Set the tray to sense automatically the paper size loaded into
it.
Tray Configuration
Tray Linking
Automatic*
O
Set the printer to link the trays that have the same paper type
and paper size settings.
Tray Configuration
Show Tray Insert Message
O
Only for unknown sizes*
Always
Display a message to select paper size and type after inserting
the tray.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 89
Menu item Description
Tray Configuration
A5 Loading
Short Edge
Long Edge*
Determine the default loading orientation for the A5 size paper
in all paper sources.
Tray Configuration
Paper Prompts
Auto*
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Set the paper source that the user fills when a prompt to load
paper appears.
Tray Configuration
Envelope Prompts
Auto*
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Envelope
Set the paper source that the user fills when a prompt to load
envelope appears.
Tray Configuration
Action for Prompts
Prompt user*
Continue
Use current
Set the printer to resolve paper- or envelope-related change
prompts.
Reports
Menu Settings Page
Event Log
Event Log Summary
HealthCheck Statistics
Print reports about printer menu settings, status, and event
logs.
Supply Usage And Counters
Clear Supply Usage History
Reset the supply page counter or view the total printed pages.
Printer Emulations
PPDS Emulation
O*
On
Set the printer to recognize and use the PPDS data stream.
Printer Emulations
PS Emulation
O
On*
Set the printer to recognize and use the PS data stream.
Printer Emulations
Emulator Security
Page Timeout
0–60 (60*)
Set the page timeout during emulation.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 90
Menu item Description
Printer Emulations
Emulator Security
Reset Emulator After Job
O*
On
Reset the emulator after a print job.
Printer Emulations
Emulator Security
Disable Printer Message Access
O
On*
Disable access to printer message during emulation.
Fax Configuration
Fax Low Power Support
Disable Sleep
Permit Sleep
Auto*
Set fax to enter Sleep mode whenever the printer determines
that it should.
Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.
Fax Configuration
Fax Storage Location
NAND
Disk*
Set the storage location for all faxes.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only when a hard disk is
installed.
• This menu item appears only in some printer models.
Print Configuration
Font Sharpening
0–150 (24*)
Set a text point-size value below which the high‑frequency
screens are used when printing font data.
For example, if the value is 24, then all fonts sized 24 points or
less use the high‑frequency screens.
Print Configuration
Print Density
1–5 (3*)
Copy Density
1–5 (3*)
Adjust the toner density when printing or copying documents.
Print Configuration
A4 Fuser
Compress*
Clip
Set the fuser behavior when printing on a letter-size paper.
Device Operations
Quiet Mode
O*
On
Set the printer to operate in Quiet Mode.
Note: Enabling this setting slows down the overall
performance of the printer.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 91
Menu item Description
Device Operations
Safe Mode
O*
On
Set the printer to operate in a special mode, in which it attempts
to continue oering as much functionality as possible, despite
known issues.
For example, when set to On, and the duplex motor is
nonfunctional, the printer performs one‑sided printing of the
documents even if the job is two‑sided printing.
Device Operations
Minimum Copy Memory
20 MB*
30 MB
50 MB
80 MB
100 MB
Set the minimum memory allocation for storing copy jobs.
Device Operations
Clear Custom Status
Erase user‑defined strings for the Default or Alternate custom
messages.
Device Operations
Clear all remotely‑installed messages
Erase messages that were remotely installed.
Device Operations
Automatically Display Error Screens
O
On*
Show existing error messages on the display after the printer
remains inactive on the home screen for a length of time equal
to the Screen Timeout setting.
Device Operations
Honor orientation on fast path copy
O*
On
Enable the printer to use the orientation setting under the Copy
menu when sending quick copy jobs.
App Configuration
LES Applications
O
On*
Enable the Lexmark Embedded Solutions (LES) applications.
Notes:
• When set to On, this setting does not aect built‑in
applications.
• This menu item appears only in the Embedded Web
Server.
Scanner Configuration
Scanner Manual Registration
Print Quick Test
Print a Quick Test target page.
Note: Make sure that the margin spacing on the target page
is uniform all the way around the target. If it is not, then the
printer margins must be reset.
Scanner Configuration
Scanner Manual Registration
Front ADF Registration
Rear ADF Registration
Flatbed Registration
Manually register the flatbed and ADF after replacing the ADF,
scanner glass, or controller board.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 92
Menu item Description
Scanner Configuration
Reset Maintenance Counter
Resetting ADF Maintenance Counter
Reset the counter after replacing the ADF maintenance kit.
Scanner Configuration
Edge Erase
Flatbed Edge Erase (3*)
ADF Edge Erase (3*)
Set the size, in millimeters, of the no‑print area around an ADF
or flatbed scan job.
Scanner Configuration
ADF Deskew
ADF Electronic Deskew(On*)
Reduce skewing of documents that are scanned from the ADF.
Scanner Configuration
Disable Scanner
Enabled*
Disabled
ADF Disabled
Disable the scanner when it is not working properly.
Scanner Configuration
Ti
Byte Order
CPU Endianness*
Little Endian
Big Endian
Set the byte order of a TIFF‑formatted scan output.
Scanner Configuration
Exact Ti Rows Per Strip
On*
O
Set the RowsPerStrip tag value of a TIFF‑formatted scan output.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Out of Service Erase
Menu item Description
Out of Service Erase
Memory Last Sanitized
Hard Disk Last Sanitized
Show information on when the printer memory or
hard disk was last sanitized.
Note: Hard Disk Last Sanitized appears only when a
hard disk is installed.
Out of Service Erase
Sanitize all information on nonvolatile memory
Erase all printer and network settings
Erase all apps and app settings
Erase all shortcuts and shortcut settings
Sanitize all information on hard disk
Erase downloads (Erase all macros, fonts, PPOs, etc.)
Erase
buered
jobs
Erase Held jobs
Clear all information on non‑volatile memory and
information on the hard disk.
Note: Sanitize all information on hard disk appears
only when a hard disk is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 93
Visible Home Screen Icons
Menu Description
Visible Home Screen Icons
Copy
E‑mail
Fax
Status/Supplies
Job Queue
Change Language
Shortcut Center
Address Book
Bookmarks
Held Jobs
USB
FTP
Scan Profiles
App Profiles
Display Customization
Scan Center
Card Copy
Specify which icons to show on the home screen.
About this Printer
Menu item Description
Asset Tag Show the serial number of the printer.
Printer’s Location Identify the printer location. The maximum length is 63 characters.
Contact Personalize the printer name. The maximum length is 63 characters.
Export Configuration File to USB Export the configuration file to a flash drive.
Export Compressed Logs to USB Export the compressed log files to a flash drive.
Send Logs
Cancel
Send
Send diagnostic information to Lexmark.
Understanding the printer menus 94
Print
Layout
Menu item Description
Sides
1‑Sided*
2‑Sided
Specify whether to print on one side or both sides of the paper.
Flip Style
Long Edge*
Short Edge
Determine which side of the paper is bound when performing two‑sided printing.
Blank Pages
Print
Do Not Print*
Print blank pages that are included in a print job.
Collate
O
(1,1,1,2,2,2)
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)*
Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence, particularly when printing multiple
copies of the job.
Separator Sheets
None*
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Insert blank separator sheets when printing.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x] (1*)
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Pages per Side
O*
2 pages per side
3 pages per side
4 pages per side
6 pages per side
9 pages per side
12 pages per side
16 pages per side
Print multiple page images on one side of a sheet of paper.
Pages per Side Ordering
Horizontal*
Reverse Horizontal
Vertical
Reverse Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple page images when using the Pages per Side menu.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 95
Menu item Description
Pages per Side Orientation
Auto*
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of multiple page images when using the Pages per Side menu.
Pages per Side Border
None*
Solid
Print a border around each page image when using the Pages per Side menu.
Copies
1–9999 (1*)
Specify the number of copies for each print job.
Print Area
Normal*
Fit to page
Whole Page
Set the printable area on a sheet of paper.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Finishing
Menu item Description
Staple Job
O*
1 staple, top left corner
2 staples, left
1 staple, top right corner
2 staples, top
1 staple, bottom left corner
2 staples, bottom
1 staple, bottom right corner
2 staples, right
Specify the staple position for all print jobs.
Note: This menu item appears only when a
finisher
is installed.
Staple Test
Start
Determine whether the staple finisher is functioning properly.
Note: This menu item appears only when a finisher is installed.
Hole Punch
O*
On
Punch holes along the edge of the printed output.
Note: This menu item appears only when a multiposition staple, hole punch
finisher
is installed.
Hole Punch Mode
2 holes
3 holes
4 holes
Set the hole punch mode for the printed output.
Notes:
• 3 holes is the U.S. factory default setting. 4 holes is the international
factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a multiposition staple, hole punch
finisher is installed.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 96
Menu item Description
Oset Pages
None*
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Oset the output of each print job or each copy of a print job.
Notes:
• Between Copies osets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On
[1,2,1,2,1,2]. If Collate is set to O [1,1,1,2,2,2], then each set of printed
pages is oset, such as all page 1s and all page 2s.
• Between Jobs sets the same oset position for the entire print job
regardless of the number of copies printed.
• This menu item appears only when a multiposition staple, hole punch
finisher is installed.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Setup
Menu item Description
Printer Language
PCL Emulation*
PS Emulation
Set the printer language.
Note: Setting a printer language default does not prevent a software
program from sending print jobs that use another printer language.
Job Waiting
O*
On
Preserve print jobs requiring supplies so that jobs not requiring the missing
supplies can print.
Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Job Hold Timeout
0–255 (30*)
Set the time in seconds that the printer waits for user intervention before
it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other
jobs in the print queue.
Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Download Target
RAM*
Disk
Specify where to save all permanent resources, such as fonts and macros,
that have been downloaded to the printer.
Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Resource Save
O*
On
Determine what the printer does with downloaded resources, such as
fonts and macros, when it receives a job that requires more than the
available memory.
Notes:
• When set to O, the printer retains downloaded resources only until
memory is needed. Resources associated with the inactive printer
language are deleted.
• When set to On, the printer preserves all the permanent
downloaded resources across all language switches. When
necessary, the printer shows memory full messages instead of
deleting permanent resources.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 97
Menu item Description
Print All Order
Alphabetical*
Newest First
Oldest First
Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print
All is selected.
Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Quality
Menu item Description
Print Resolution
300 dpi
600 dpi*
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q
Set the resolution for the text and images on the printed output.
Note: Resolution is determined in dots per inch or image quality.
Pixel Boost
O*
Fonts
Horizontally
Vertically
Both directions
Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity, in order to enhance text and
images.
Toner Darkness
1 to 10 (8*)
Determine the lightness or darkness of text images.
Halftone
Normal*
Detail
Enhance the printed output to have smoother lines with sharper edges.
Brightness
‑6 to 6 (0*)
Adjust the brightness of the printed output.
Contrast
0 to 5 (0*)
Adjust the contrast of the printed output.
Gray Correction
Auto*
Normal
Adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 98
Job Accounting
Menu item Description
Job Accounting
O*
On
Set the printer to create a log of the print jobs that it receives.
Note: This menu item appears only when a flash memory or hard disk is
installed.
Accounting Log Frequency
Daily
Weekly
Monthly*
Specify how often the printer creates a log file.
Log Action at End of Frequency
None*
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Specify how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.
Note: The value defined in Accounting Log Frequency determines when this
action is triggered.
Log Near Full Level
O
On (5)*
Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Log
Action at Near Full.
Note: This menu item appears only when a flash memory or hard disk is
installed.
Log Action at Near Full
None*
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All But Current
Delete All Logs
Specify how the printer responds when the hard disk is nearly full.
Note: The value defined in Log Near Full Level determines when this action
is triggered.
Log Action at Full
None*
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All But Current
Delete All Logs
Specify how the printer responds when hard disk usage reaches the maximum
limit (100MB).
URL to Post Log Specify where the printer posts job accounting logs.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 99
Menu item Description
E‑mail Address to Send Logs Specify the e‑mail address to which the printer sends job accounting logs.
Log File Prefix Specify the prefix for the log files.
Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the
default log
file
prefix.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
XPS
Menu item Description
Print Error Pages
O*
On
Print a test page that contains information on errors.
Minimum Line Width
1–30 (2*)
Set the minimum stroke width of any job printed in 1200 dpi.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
PDF
Menu item Description
Scale To Fit
O*
On
Scale the page content to fit the selected paper size.
Annotations
Print
Do Not Print*
Specify whether to print annotations in the PDF.
Print PDF Error
O
On*
Enable the printing of PDF error.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
PostScript
Menu item Description
Print PS Error
O*
On
Print a page that describes the PostScript® error.
Note: When an error occurs, processing of the job stops, the printer
prints an error message, and the rest of the print job is
flushed.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 100
Menu item Description
Minimum Line Width
1–30 (2*)
Set the minimum stroke width.
Notes:
• Jobs printed in 1200 dpi use the value directly.
• Jobs printed in 4800 CQ use half the value.
Lock PS Startup Mode
O
On*
Disable the SysStart file.
Image Smoothing
O*
On
Enhance the contrast and sharpness of low‑resolution images.
Note: This setting has no eect on images with a resolution of 300 dpi or
higher.
Font Priority
Resident*
Flash/Disk
Establish the font search order.
Notes:
• Resident sets the printer to search its memory for the requested font
before searching the flash memory or printer hard disk.
• Flash/Disk sets the printer to search the flash memory or printer hard
disk for the requested font before searching the printer memory.
• This menu item appears only when a flash memory or hard disk is
installed.
Wait Timeout
O
On* (40 seconds)
Enable the printer to wait for more data before canceling a print job.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
PCL
Menu item Description
Font Source
Resident*
Disk
Flash
All
Choose the source which contains the default font selection.
Notes:
• Flash and Disk appear only when a flash memory or hard disk is
installed.
• For Flash and Disk to appear, make sure that they are not read‑ or
write‑protected.
Font Name
Courier*
Select a font from the specified font source.
Symbol Set
10U PC‑8*
Specify the symbol set for each font name.
Note: A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters,
punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the dierent
languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 101
Menu item Description
Pitch
0.08–100 (10*)
Specify the pitch for fixed or monospaced fonts.
Note: Pitch refers to the number of
fixed
‑space characters in a horizontal
inch of type.
Orientation
Portrait*
Landscape
Reverse Portrait*
Reverse Landscape
Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.
Lines per Page
1–255
Specify the number of lines of text for each page printed through the PCL®
data stream.
Notes:
• This menu item activates vertical escapement that causes the
selected number of requested lines to print between the default
margins of the page.
• 60 is the U.S. factory default setting. 64 is the international factory
default setting.
PCL5 Minimum Line Width
1–30 (2*)
Set the initial minimum stroke width of any job printed in 1200 dpi.
PCLXL Minimum Line Width
1–30 (2*)
A4 Width
198 mm*
203 mm
Set the width of the logical page on A4‑size paper.
Note: Logical page is the space on the physical page where data is
printed.
Auto CR after LF
O*
On
Set the printer to perform a carriage return after a line feed control
command.
Note: Carriage return is a mechanism that commands the printer to move
the position of the cursor to the first position on the same line.
Auto LF after CR
O*
On
Set the printer to perform a line feed after a carriage return control
command.
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
Assign Tray [x]
Assign Manual Paper
Assign Manual Envelope
View Factory Defaults
Restore Defaults
• Configure the printer to work with a dierent print driver or custom
application that uses a dierent set of source assignments to request a
given paper source.
• Show the factory default value assigned for each paper source.
• Restore the tray renumber values to their factory defaults.
Print Timeout
O
On* (90 seconds)
Set the printer to end a print job after it has been idle for the specified
amount of time.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 102
HTML
Menu item Description
Font Name
Times*
Set the font to use when printing HTML documents.
Font Size
1–255 (12*)
Set the font size to use when printing HTML documents.
Scale
1–400% (100*)
Scale HTML documents for printing.
Orientation
Portrait*
Landscape
Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Margin Size
8–255 mm (19*)
Set the page margin for HTML documents.
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print*
Print background information or graphics in HTML documents.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Image
Menu item Description
Auto Fit
On
O*
Select the best available paper size and orientation setting for an image.
Note: When set to On, this menu item overrides the scaling and orientation
settings for the image.
Invert
O*
On
Invert bitonal monochrome images.
Note: This menu item does not apply to GIF or JPEG image formats.
Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit*
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Adjust the image to fit the printable area.
Note: When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Orientation
Portrait*
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 103
Paper
Tray Configuration
Menu item Description
Default Source
Tray [x] (1*)
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set the paper source for all print jobs.
Paper Size/Type
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Specify the paper size or paper type loaded in each paper source.
Substitute Size
O
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed*
Set the printer to substitute a specified paper size if the requested size is not
loaded in any paper source.
Notes:
•
O
prompts the user to load the required paper size.
• Statement/A5 prints A5‑size document on statement when loading
statement and statement‑size jobs on A5 paper size when loading A5.
Statement/A5 appears only in the Embedded Web Server.
• Letter/A4 prints A4‑size document on letter when loading letter and
letter‑size jobs on A4 paper size when loading letter.
• All Listed substitutes Letter/A4.
Configure MP
Cassette*
Manual
First
Determine the behavior of the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
• Cassette configures the multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper
source.
• Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual-feed print jobs.
• First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Media Configuration
Universal Setup
Menu item Description
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Specify the unit of measurement for the universal paper.
Note: Inches is the U.S. factory default setting. Millimeters is the
international factory default setting.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 104
Menu item Description
Portrait Width
3–52 inches (8.5*)
76–1321 mm (216*)
Set the portrait width of the universal paper.
Portrait Height
3–52 inches (14*)
76.2–1321 mm (356*)
Set the portrait height of the universal paper.
Feed Direction
Short Edge*
Long Edge
Set the printer to pick paper from the short edge or long edge
direction.
Note: Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter
than the maximum width supported.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Custom Scan Sizes
Menu item Description
Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Width
1–8.5 inches (8.5*)
25.4–215.9 mm (215.9*)
Height
1–25 inches (14*)
25.4–635 mm (355.6*)
Orientation
Portrait*
Landscape
2 scans per side
O*
On
Assign a scan size name and configure the scan settings.
Understanding the printer menus 105
Media Types
Menu item Description
Plain
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light
Heavy
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [X]
Specify the texture, weight, and orientation of the paper.
Bin
Configuration
Menu item Description
Output Bin
Standard Bin*
Bin [x]
Specify the output bin.
Configure Bins
Mailbox*
Link
Link Optional
Type Assignment
Configure the mode of operation for the output bins.
Notes:
• Mailbox allows the standard bin and any optional bin to be selected
individually.
• Link allows all output bins to be linked together as though they were one
large bin.
• Link Optional treats all optional bins as one large output bin.
• Type Assignment assigns each paper type a bin or a linked bin set.
Custom Bin Names
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Assign a name for the bin.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 106
Copy
Copy Defaults
Menu item Description
Content Type
Te xt
Te xt /P h ot o*
Photo
Graphics
Improve the output result based on the content of the original document.
Content Source
Black and White Laser*
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Improve the output result based on the source of the original document.
Sides
1 sided to 1 sided*
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Specify the scanning behavior based on the original document.
Separator Sheets
None*
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether to insert blank separator sheets when printing.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x] (1*)
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Pages per Side
O*
2 Portrait pages
4 Portrait pages
2 Landscape pages
4 Landscape pages
Specify the number of page images to print on one side of a sheet of paper.
Print Page Borders
O*
On
Place a border around each image when printing multiple pages on a single
page.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 107
Menu item Description
Collate
O [1,1,1,2,2,2]
On [1,2,1,2,1,2]*
Print multiple copies in sequence.
Oset Pages
None*
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Oset the output of each print job or each copy of a print job.
Notes:
• Between Copies osets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On
[1,2,1,2,1,2]. If Collate is set to
O
[1,1,1,2,2,2], then each set of printed pages
are oset, such as all page 1s and all page 2s.
• Between Jobs sets the same oset position for the entire print job
regardless of the number of copies printed.
• This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed.
Staple
O*
1 staple, top left corner
2 staples, left
1 staple, top right corner
2 staples, top
1 staple, bottom left corner
2 staples, bottom
1 staple, bottom right corner
2 staples, right
Specify the staple position for all print jobs.
Note: This menu item appears only when a staple
finisher
is installed.
Punch
O*
2 holes
3 holes
Set the punch mode for all print jobs.
Note: This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed.
“Copy from” Size Set the paper size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
“Copy to” Source
Tray [x] (1*)
Multipurpose Feeder
Auto Size Match
Specify the paper source for the copy job.
Darkness
1 to 9 (5*)
Adjust the darkness of the scanned image.
Number of Copies
1–9999 (1*)
Specify the number of copies.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 108
Menu item Description
Header/Footer
Left Header
Middle Header
Right Header
Left Footer
Middle Footer
Right Footer
Specify the header or footer information on the scanned image.
Overlay
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
O*
Specify the overlay text to print on each copy.
Custom overlay Type the text for the Custom choice in Overlay menu.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Advanced Imaging
Menu item Description
Color Dropout
Color Dropout (None*)
Default Red Threshold (128*)
Default Green Threshold (128*)
Default Blue Threshold (128*)
Specify which color to drop during scanning, and adjust the dropout
setting for that color.
Contrast
Best for content*
0–5
Specify the contrast for the scanned image.
Background Removal
Background Detection (Content‑based*)
Level (0*)
Remove the background color or image noise from the original
document.
Notes:
• Content-based removes the background color from the original
document .
• Fixed removes image noise from a photo.
Auto Center
O*
On
Align the content at the center of the page.
Mirror Image
O*
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 109
Menu item Description
Negative Image
O*
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4 (0*)
Adjust the shadow detail in the original document.
Scan Edge to Edge
O*
On
Scan the original document from edge to edge.
Sharpness
1–5 (3*)
Adjust the sharpness of the scanned image.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Admin Controls
Menu item Description
Transparency Separators
O
On*
Insert a blank sheet between transparencies.
Allow Priority Copies
O
On*
Interrupt a print job to make copies.
Custom Job Scanning
O*
On
Set the printer to scan the first set of original documents using the specified
settings, and then scan the next set with the same or dierent settings.
Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
O
On*
Save copy settings as a shortcut.
Adjust ADF Skew
O*
On
Set the printer to adjust the skewed images from documents that are scanned
from the ADF.
Sample copy
O*
On
Print a sample copy to check the quality before printing the remaining copies.
Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 110
Fax
Fax Defaults
Fax Mode
Menu item Description
Fax Mode
Fax
Fax Server
Disabled
Select a fax mode.
Note: Depending on your printer model, the factory default
setting may vary.
Fax Setup
General Fax settings
Menu item Description
Fax Name Identify your fax machine.
Fax Number Identify your fax number.
Fax ID
Fax Name
Fax Number*
Notify fax recipients of your fax name or fax number.
Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal*
Mostly send
All send
Set the amount of internal printer memory allocated for faxing.
Note: This menu item prevents memory buer conditions and failed faxes.
Cancel Faxes
Allow*
Don't Allow
Cancel outgoing faxes before they are transmitted, or cancel incoming faxes
before they finish printing.
Fax Number Masking
O*
From Left
From Right
Specify the format for masking an outgoing fax number.
Digits to Mask
0–58 (0*)
Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.
Enable Line Connected
Detection
On*
O
Determine whether a telephone line is connected to the printer.
Note: Detection takes place when turning on the printer and before each call.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 111
Menu item Description
Optimize Fax Compatibility Configure the printer fax functionality for optimal compatibility with other fax
machines.
Fax Transport
T.38
Analog
G.711
etherFAX
Set the fax transport method.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only if an etherFAX or Fax over IP (FoIP) license
bundle is installed in the printer.
• Depending on your printer model, the factory default settings may vary.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
HTTPS Fax Settings
Note: This menu appears only if Fax Transport is set to etherFAX.
Menu item Description
HTTPS service URL Specify the etherFAX service URL.
HTTPS Proxy Specify a proxy server URL.
HTTPS Proxy User Specify the user name and password for the proxy server.
HTTPS Proxy Password
Fax Send Encryption
Disabled
Enabled*
Required
Enable encryption for outgoing fax messages.
Fax Receive Encryption
Disabled
Enabled*
Required
Enable encryption for incoming fax messages.
HTTPS Fax Status Show the etherFAX communication status.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Fax Send Settings
Menu item Description
Resolution
Standard*
Fine
Super Fine
Ultra Fine
Set the resolution of the scanned image.
Note: A higher resolution increases fax transmission time and requires more
memory.
Original Size
[List of paper sizes] (Mixed
Sizes*)
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 112
Menu item Description
Orientation
Portrait*
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the original document.
Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.
Sides
O*
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specify the orientation of the original document when scanning on both sides
of the document.
Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.
Content Type
Te xt *
Te xt /P h ot o
Photo
Graphics
Improve the output result based on the content of the original document.
Content Source
Black and White Laser*
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Improve the output result based on the source of the original document.
Darkness
1–9 (5*)
Adjust the darkness of the scanned image.
Behind a PABX
On
O*
Set the printer to dial a fax number without waiting to recognize the dial tone.
Note: Private Automated Branch Exchange (PABX) is a telephone network that
allows a single access number to oer multiple lines to outside callers.
Dial Mode
To ne *
Pulse
Specify the dial mode for incoming or outgoing faxes.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Advanced Imaging
Menu item Description
Color Balance
Cyan ‑ Red
-4 to 4 (0*)
Magenta ‑ Green
-4 to 4 (0*)
Ye l l o w ‑ Blue
-4 to 4 (0*)
Adjust the color intensity during scanning.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 113
Menu item Description
Color Dropout
Color Dropout (None*)
Default Red Threshold (128*)
Default Green Threshold
(128*)
Default Blue Threshold (128*)
Specify which color to drop during scanning, and adjust the dropout setting for
that color.
Contrast
Best for Content*
0
1
2
3
4
5
Set the contrast of the output.
Background Removal
Level
‑4 to 4 (0*)
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Mirror Image
O*
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Negative Image
O*
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4 (0*)
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Scan Edge to Edge
On
O*
Allow edge‑to‑edge scanning of the original document.
Sharpness
1–5 (3*)
Adjust the sharpness of the scanned image.
Temperatur e
‑4 to 4 (0*)
Specify whether to generate a cooler or warmer output.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 114
Admin Controls
Menu item Description
Enable Color Fax Scans
O by Default*
On by Default
Never Use
Always Use
Enable color scans for fax.
Automatic Redial
0–9 (5*)
Adjust the number of redial attempts based on the activity levels of recipient fax
machines.
Redial Frequency
1–200 minutes (3*)
Increase the time between redial attempts to increase the chance of sending
fax successfully.
Enable ECM
On*
O
Activate Error Correction Mode (ECM) for fax jobs.
Note: ECM detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process caused
by telephone line noise and poor signal strength.
Enable Fax Scans
On*
O
Fax documents that are scanned at the printer.
Driver to Fax
On*
O
Allow the print driver to send fax.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On*
O
Save fax numbers as shortcuts on the printer.
Max Speed
33600*
14400
9600
4800
2400
Set the maximum speed for sending fax.
Custom Job Scanning
O*
On
Turn on scanning of custom jobs by default.
Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Scan Preview
O*
On
Show a preview of the scan on the display.
Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Adjust ADF Skew
O*
On
Correct slight skew in the scanned image.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 115
Menu item Description
Auto Convert Color Faxes to
Mono Faxes
On*
O
Convert all outgoing color faxes to black and white.
Confirm Fax Number
O*
On
Ask the user to confirm the fax number.
Dial Prefix Set a dialing prefix.
Dialing Prefix Rules Establish a dialing prefix rule.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Fax Receive Settings
Menu item Description
Fax Job Waiting
None*
To ne r
Toner and Supplies
Remove fax jobs that request specific unavailable resources from the print
queue.
Rings to Answer
1–25 (3*)
Set the number of rings for incoming fax.
Auto Reduction
On*
O
Scale incoming fax to fit on the page.
Paper Source
Tray [X]
Auto*
Set the paper source for printing incoming fax.
Sides
On
O*
Print on both sides of the paper.
Separator Sheets
None*
Before Job
After Job
Specify whether to insert blank separator sheets when printing.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [X] (1*)
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Specify the output bin for received faxes.
Fax Footer
On
O*
Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received
fax.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 116
Menu item Description
Fax Footer Time Stamp
Receive*
Print
Print the time stamp at the bottom of each page from a received fax.
Staple
O*
1 staple
2 staples
Staple the printed fax document.
Note: This menu item appears only when a finisher is installed.
Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
O*
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Hold received faxes from printing until they are released.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Admin Controls
Menu item Description
Enable Fax Receive
On*
O
Set the printer to receive fax.
Enable Color Fax Receive
On*
O
Set the printer to receive fax in color.
Enable Caller ID
On
O*
Show the number that is sending the incoming fax.
Block No Name Fax
On
O*
Block incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax ID specified.
Banned Fax List
Add Banned Fax
Specify the phone numbers that you want to block.
Answer On
All Rings*
Single Ring Only
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only
Set a distinctive ring pattern for incoming fax.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 117
Menu item Description
Auto Answer
On*
O
Set the printer to receive fax automatically.
Fax Forwarding
Print*
Print and Forward
Forward
Specify whether to forward received fax.
Forward To
Destination 1
Destination 2
Specify where to forward received fax.
Note: This menu item appears only when Fax Forwarding is set to Print and
Forward or Forward.
Max Speed
33600*
14400
9600
4800
2400
Set the maximum speed for transmitting fax.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 118
Fax Cover Page
Menu item Description
Fax Cover Page
O by Default*
On by Default
Never Use
Always Use
Configure the settings for the fax cover page.
Include To field
O*
On
Include From field
O*
On
From
Include Message Field
O*
On
Message:
Include Logo
O*
On
Include Footer [x]
O*
On
Footer [x]
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Fax Log settings
Menu item Description
Transmission Log Frequency
Always*
Never
Only for Error
Specify how often the printer creates a transmission log.
Transmission Log Action
Print
O
On*
E‑mail
O*
On
Print or e‑mail a log for successful fax transmission or transmission error.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 119
Menu item Description
Receive Error Log
Print Never*
Print on Error
Print a log for fax‑receive failures.
Auto Print Logs
On*
O
Print all fax activity.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x] (1*)
Specify the paper source for printing logs.
Logs Display
Remote Fax Name*
Dialed Number
Identify the sender by remote fax name or fax number.
Enable Job Log
On*
O
View a summary of all fax jobs.
Enable Call Log
On*
O
View a summary of fax dialing history.
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin*
Bin [x]
Specify the output bin for printed logs.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Speaker settings
Menu item Description
Speaker Mode
Always
O*
Always On
On until Connected
Set the fax speaker mode.
Speaker Volume
Low*
High
Adjust the fax speaker volume.
Ringer Volume
O*
On
Enable the ringer volume.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 120
Fax Server Setup
General Fax Settings
Menu item Description
To Fo rma t Specify a fax recipient.
Note: If you want to use the fax number, then type the number sign (#) before
a number.
Reply Address Specify a reply address for sending fax.
Subject Specify the fax subject and message.
Message
Enable analog receive
O*
On
Set the printer to receive analog faxes.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Fax Server E‑mail Settings
Menu item Description
Use E‑mail SMTP Server
On*
O
Use the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) settings for e‑mail in receiving
and sending faxes.
Note: When set to On, all other settings of theFax Server E‑mail Settings
menu are not shown.
Primary SMTP Gateway Type the IP address or host name of the primary SMTP server.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
1–65535 (25*)
Enter the port number of the primary SMTP server.
Secondary SMTP Gateway Type the server IP address or host name of your secondary or backup SMTP
server.
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
1–65535 (25*)
Enter the server port number of your secondary or backup SMTP server.
SMTP Timeout
5–30 (30*)
Set the time before the printer times out if the SMTP server does not respond.
Reply Address Specify a reply address for sending fax.
Use SSL/TLS
Disabled*
Negotiate
Required
Specify whether to send fax using an encrypted link.
Require Trusted Certificate
O
On*
Specify a trusted certificate when accessing the SMTP server.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 121
Menu item Description
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required*
Login / Plain
NTLM
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
Kerberos 5
Set the authentication type for the SMTP server.
Device
‑Initiated E‑mail
None*
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Specify whether credentials are required for device‑initiated e‑mail.
User
‑Initiated E‑mail
None*
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID and
Password
Use Session E‑mail address
and Password
Prompt user
Specify whether credentials are required for user‑initiated e‑mail.
Use Active Directory Device
Credentials
O*
On
Enable user credentials and group destinations to connect to the SMTP server.
Device Userid Specify the user ID and password to connect to the SMTP server.
Device Password
Kerberos 5 REALM Specify the realm for the Kerberos 5 authentication protocol.
NTLM Domain Specify the domain name for the NTLM security protocol.
Disable "SMTP server not set
up" error
O*
On
Hide the “SMTP server not set up” error message.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Fax Server Scan Settings
Menu item Description
Image Format
TIFF (.tif)
PDF (.pdf)*
XPS (.xps)
Specify the file format for the scanned image.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 122
Menu item Description
Content Type
Te xt *
Te xt /P h ot o
Photo
Graphics
Improve the output result based on the content of the original document.
Content Source
Black and White Laser*
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Improve the output result based on the source of the original document.
Fax Resolution
Standard*
Fine
Super Fine
Ultra Fine
Set the fax resolution.
Sides
O*
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specify the orientation of the original document when scanning on both sides
of the document.
Darkness
1–9 (5*)
Set the darkness of the output.
Orientation
Portrait*
Landscape
Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.
Original Size
[List of paper sizes]
Set the paper size of the original document.
Notes:
• Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
• This setting may vary depending on your printer model.
Use Multi
‑Page TIFF
O
On*
Choose between single‑ and multiple‑page TIFF files.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 123
E-mail
E
‑mail Setup
Menu item Description
Primary SMTP Gateway Type the IP address or host name of the primary SMTP server for
sending e-mail.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
1–65535 (25*)
Enter the port number of the primary SMTP server.
Secondary SMTP Gateway Type the server IP address or host name of your secondary or
backup SMTP server.
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
1–65535 (25*)
Enter the server port number of your secondary or backup SMTP
server.
SMTP Timeout
5–30 seconds (30*)
Set the time before the printer times out if the SMTP server does
not respond.
Reply Address Specify a reply address in the e‑mail.
Always use SMTP default Reply Address
On
O*
Always use the default reply address in the SMTP server.
Use SSL/TLS
Disabled*
Negotiate
Required
Specify whether to send e‑mail using an encrypted link.
Require Trusted Certificate
O
On*
Require a trusted certificate when accessing the SMTP server.
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required*
Login / Plain
NTLM
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
Kerberos 5
Set the authentication type for the SMTP server.
Device
‑Initiated E‑mail
None*
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Specify whether credentials are required for device‑initiated e‑mail.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 124
Menu item Description
User‑Initiated E‑mail
None*
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID and Password
Use Session E‑mail address and Password
Prompt user
Specify whether credentials are required for user‑initiated e‑mail.
Use Active Directory Device Credentials
O*
On
Specify whether credentials are required for user‑initiated e‑mail.
Device Userid Specify the user ID and password to connect to the SMTP server.
Device Password
Kerberos 5 REALM Specify the realm for the Kerberos 5 authentication protocol.
NTLM Domain Specify the domain name for the NTLM security protocol.
Disable “SMTP server not set up” error
O*
On
Hide the “SMTP server not set up” error message.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
E‑mail Defaults
Menu item Description
Subject: Specify the e‑mail subject and message.
Message:
File Name Specify the filename for the scanned document.
Format
JPEG (.jpg)
PDF (.pdf)*
TIFF (.tif)
XPS (.xps)
TXT (.txt)
RTF (.rtf)
DOCX (.docx)
CSV (.csv)
Specify the file format of the scanned document.
Note: The menu items may vary depending on your printer model.
Global OCR Settings
Recognized Languages
Auto Rotate
Despeckle
Auto Contrast Enhance
Configure the settings for optical character recognition (OCR).
Note: This menu item appears only if you have purchased and installed an OCR
solution.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 125
Menu item Description
PDF Settings
PDF Version (1.5*)
Archival Version (A‑1a*)
Highly Compressed (O*)
Secure (O*)
Archival (PDF/A)
(O*)
Configure the PDF settings of the scanned document.
Notes:
• Archival Version and Archival (PDF/A) are supported only when PDF Version is
set to 1.4.
• Highly Compressed appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Content Type
Te xt
Te xt /P h ot o*
Photo
Graphics
Improve the output result based on the content type of the original document.
Content Source
Black and White Laser*
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Improve the output result based on the content source of the original document.
Color
Black and White
Gray
Color*
Auto
Set the printer to capture file content in color or in mono.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi*
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Set the resolution of the scanned image.
Darkness
1–9 (5*)
Adjust the darkness of the scanned image.
Orientation
Portrait*
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the original document.
Original Size
Mixed Sizes*
Set the paper size of the original document.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 126
Menu item Description
Sides
O*
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specify the orientation of the original document when scanning on both sides of the
document.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Advanced Imaging
Menu item Description
Color Balance
Cyan (0*)
Magenta (0*)
Ye l lo w (0 * )
Adjust the color intensity for cyan, magenta, and yellow.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None*
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255 (128*)
Default Green Threshold
0–255 (128*)
Default Blue Threshold
0–255 (128*)
Specify which color to drop during scanning, and adjust the dropout
setting for that color.
Auto Color Detect
Color Sensitivity
1–9 (5*)
Area Sensitivity
1–9 (5*)
E‑mail Bit Depth
1 bit*
8 bit
Minimum Scan Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi*
Configure the auto color detection setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content*
5–95
Set the JPEG quality of the scanned image.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 127
Menu item Description
Contrast
Best for content*
0–5
Specify the contrast for the scanned image.
Background Removal
Background Detection
Content‑based*
Fixed
Level ‑4 to 4 (0*)
Remove the background color or image noise from the original
document.
Notes:
• Content-based removes the background color from the original
document.
• Fixed removes image noise from a photo.
Mirror Image
O*
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Negative Image
O*
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4 (0*)
Adjust the shadow detail in the scanned image.
Scan Edge to Edge
O*
On
Scan the original document from edge to edge.
Sharpness
1–5 (3*)
Adjust the sharpness in the scanned image.
Temperatur e
‑4 to 4 (0*)
Generate a bluer or redder output of the original document.
Blank Pages
Blank Page Removal (Do Not Remove*)
Blank Page Sensitivity (5*)
Set the sensitivity of scans in relation to blank pages in the original
document.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Admin Controls
Menu item Description
Max E‑mail Size
0–65535 (0*)
Set the allowable file size for each e‑mail.
Size Error Message Specify an error message that the printer sends when an e‑mail exceeds
its allowable file size.
Note: You can type up to 1024 characters.
Limit Destinations Limit sending of e‑mail only to the specified list of domain name.
Note: Use a comma to separate each domain.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 128
Menu item Description
Send Me a Copy
Never appears*
On by Default
O by Default
Always On
Send a copy of the e‑mail to yourself.
Allow self e
‑mails only
O*
On
Set the printer to send e‑mails to yourself only.
Use cc:/bcc:
O*
On
Enable carbon copy and blind carbon copy in e‑mail.
Use Multi
‑Page TIFF
O
On*
Enable scanning of multiple TIFF images in one TIFF file.
TIFF Compression
JPEG
LZW*
Specify the compression type for TIFF files.
Text D efa ult
5–95 (75*)
Set the text quality in the content being scanned.
Text/ Ph oto Default
5–95 (75*)
Set the text and photo quality in the content being scanned.
Photo Default
5–95 (50*)
Set the photo quality of the content being scanned.
Adjust ADF Skew
O*
On
Set the printer to adjust the skewed images from documents that are
scanned from the ADF.
Transmission Log
Print log*
Do Not Print Log
Print Only For Error
Print a transmission log for e‑mail scans.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x] (1*)
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing e‑mail logs.
Custom Job Scanning
O*
On
Set the printer to scan the first set of original documents using the
specified settings, and then next set with the same or dierent settings.
Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Scan Preview
O
On*
Show a scan preview of the original document.
Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 129
Menu item Description
Allow Save as Shortcut
O
On*
Save an e‑mail address as a shortcut.
E
‑mail Images Sent As
Attachment*
Web Link
Specify how to send the images that are included in the e‑mail.
Reset E-mail Information After Sending
O
On*
Reset the To, Subject, Message, and Filename fields to their default
values after sending an e‑mail.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Web Link Setup
Menu item Description
Server Specify the credentials of the server that is hosting the images that are included
in the e-mail.
Login
Password
Path
File Name
Web Link
FTP
FTP Defaults
Menu item Description
Format
JPEG (.jpg)
PDF (.pdf)*
TIFF (.tif)
XPS (.xps)
TXT (.txt)
RTF (.rtf)
DOCX (.docx)
CSV (.csv)
Specify the file format for the scanned image.
Note: The menu items may vary depending on your printer model.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 130
Menu item Description
Global OCR Settings
Recognized Languages
Auto Rotate
Despeckle
Auto Contrast Enhance
Configure the settings for optical character recognition (OCR).
Note: This menu item appears only if you have purchased and installed an OCR
solution.
PDF Settings
PDF Version (1.5*)
Archival Version (A‑1a*)
Highly Compressed (O*)
Secure
(O*)
Archival (PDF/A) (O*)
Configure the PDF settings for the scanned image.
Notes:
• Archival Version and Archival (PDF/A) are supported only when PDF Version is
set to 1.4.
• Highly Compressed appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Content Type
Te xt
Te xt /P h ot o*
Photo
Graphics
Improve the output result based on the content type of the original document.
Content Source
Black and White Laser*
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Improve the output result based on the content source of the original document.
Color
Black and White
Gray
Color*
Auto
Set the printer to capture file content in color or in mono.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi*
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Set the resolution of the scanned image.
Darkness
1–9 (5*)
Adjust the darkness of the scanned image.
Orientation
Portrait*
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the original document.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 131
Menu item Description
Original Size
Mixed Sizes*
Set the paper size of the original document.
Sides
O*
Long Edge
Short Edge
Specify the orientation when scanning on both sides of the document.
File Name Specify the file name of the scanned image.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Advanced Imaging
Menu item Description
Color Balance
Cyan (0*)
Magenta (0*)
Ye l lo w (0 * )
Adjust the color intensity for cyan, magenta, and yellow.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None*
Red*
Green*
Blue*
Default Red Threshold
0–255 (128*)
Default Green Threshold
0–255 (128*)
Default Blue Threshold
0–255 (128*)
Specify which color to drop during scanning, and adjust the dropout setting for that
color.
Auto Color Detect
Color Sensitivity
1–9 (5*)
Area Sensitivity
1–9 (5*)
FTP Bit Depth
1 bit*
8 bit
Minimum Scan Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi*
Configure the auto color detection setting.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 132
Menu item Description
JPEG Quality
Best for content*
5–95
Set the JPEG quality of the scanned image.
Contrast
Best for content*
0
1
2
3
4
5
Specify the contrast for the scanned image.
Background Removal
Background Detection
Content‑based*
Fixed
Level -4 to 4 (0*)
Remove the background color or image noise from the original document.
Notes:
• Content-based removes the background color from the original document .
• Fixed removes image noise from a photo.
Mirror Image
O*
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Negative Image
O*
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4 (0*)
Adjust the shadow detail in the scanned image.
Scan Edge to Edge
O*
On
Allow edge‑to‑edge scanning of the original document.
Sharpness
1–5 (3*)
Adjust the sharpness in the scanned image.
Temperatur e
‑4 to 4 (0*)
Generate a bluer or redder output of the original document.
Blank Pages
Blank Page Removal
Do Not Remove*
Remove
Blank Page Sensitivity
1–9 (5*)
Set the sensitivity of scans in relation to blank pages in the original document.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 133
Admin Controls
Menu item Description
Text D efa ult
5–95 (75*)
Set the quality of text on the scanned image.
Text/ Ph oto Default
5–95 (75*)
Set the quality of text and photo on the scanned image.
Photo Default
5–95 (50*)
Set the quality of photo on the scanned image.
Use Multi
‑Page TIFF
On*
O
Enable scanning of multiple TIFF images in one TIFF file.
TIFF Compression
LZW*
JPEG
Specify the compression type for TIFF files.
Transmission Log
Print Log*
Do Not Print Log
Print Only For Error
Print a transmission log for FTP scans.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x] (1*)
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing FTP logs.
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin*
Bin [x]
Specify the output bin for printed FTP logs.
Custom Job Scanning
O*
On
Turn on scanning of custom jobs by default.
Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Scan Preview
O
On*
Show a preview of the scan on the display.
Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
O
On*
Save an FTP address as a shortcut.
Adjust ADF Skew
O*
On
Set the printer to adjust the skewed images from documents that are scanned
from the ADF.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 134
USB Drive
Flash Drive Scan
Menu item Description
Format
JPEG (.jpg)
PDF (.pdf)*
TIFF (.tif)
XPS (.xps)
TXT (.txt)
RTF (.rtf)
DOCX (.docx)
CSV (.csv)
Specify the file format for the scanned image.
Note: The menu items may vary depending on your printer model.
Global OCR Settings
Recognized Languages
Auto Rotate
Despeckle
Auto Contrast Enhance
Configure the settings for optical character recognition (OCR).
Note: This menu item appears only if you have purchased and installed an OCR
solution.
PDF Settings
PDF Version (1.5*)
Archival Version (A‑1a*)
Highly Compressed (O*)
Secure
(O*)
Archival (PDF/A) (O*)
Configure the PDF settings of the scanned image.
Notes:
• Archival Version and Archival (PDF/A) are supported only when PDF Version is
set to 1.4.
• Highly Compressed appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Content Type
Te xt
Te xt /P h ot o*
Photo
Graphics
Improve the output result based on the content type of the original document.
Content Source
Black and White Laser*
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Improve the output result based on the content source of the original document.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 135
Menu item Description
Color
Black and White
Gray
Color*
Auto
Set the printer to capture file content in color or in mono.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi*
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Set the resolution of the scanned image.
Darkness
1–9 (5*)
Adjust the darkness of the scanned image.
Orientation
Portrait*
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the original document.
Original Size
Mixed Sizes*
Set the paper size of the original document.
Sides
O*
Long edge
Short edge
Specify the orientation of the original document when scanning on both sides of the
document.
File Name Specify the file name of the scanned image.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Advanced Imaging
Menu item Description
Color Balance
Cyan (0*)
Magenta (0*)
Ye l lo w (0 * )
Adjust the color intensity for cyan, magenta, and yellow.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 136
Menu item Description
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None*
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255 (128*)
Default Green Threshold
0–255 (128*)
Default Blue Threshold
0–255 (128*)
Specify which color to drop during scanning, and adjust the dropout setting for that
color.
Auto Color Detect
Color Sensitivity
1–9 (5*)
Area Sensitivity
1–9 (5*)
Scan Bit Depth
1 bit*
8 bit
Minimum Scan Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi*
Configure the auto color detection setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content*
5–95
Set the JPEG quality of the scanned image.
Contrast
Best for content*
0–5
Specify the contrast for the scanned image.
Background Removal
Background Detection
Content‑based*
Fixed
Level (0*)
Remove the background color or image noise from the original document.
Notes:
• Content-based removes the background color from the original document.
• Fixed removes image noise from a photo.
Mirror Image
O*
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Negative Image
O*
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 137
Menu item Description
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4 (0*)
Adjust the shadow detail in the scanned image.
Scan Edge to Edge
O*
On
Scan the original document from edge to edge.
Sharpness
1–5 (3*)
Adjust the sharpness in the scanned image.
Temperatur e
‑4 to 4 (0*)
Generate a bluer or redder output of the original document.
Blank Pages
Blank Page Removal
Do Not Remove*
Remove
Blank Page Sensitivity
1–9 (5*)
Set the sensitivity of scans in relation to blank pages in the original document.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Admin Controls
Menu item Description
Text D efa ult
5–95 (75*)
Set the quality of text on the scanned image.
Text/ Ph oto Default
5–95 (75*)
Set the quality of text and photo on the scanned image.
Photo Default
5–95 (50*)
Set the quality of a photo on the scanned image.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
O
On*
Enable scanning of multiple TIFF images in one TIFF file.
TIFF Compression
LZW*
JPEG
Specify the compression type for TIFF files.
Custom Job Scanning
O*
On
Turn on scanning of custom jobs by default.
Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Scan Preview
O
On*
Show a preview of the scan on the display.
Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 138
Menu item Description
Adjust ADF Skew
O*
On
Set the printer to adjust the skewed images from documents that are scanned
from the ADF.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Flash Drive Print
Menu item Description
Number of Copies
1–9999 (1*)
Set the number of copies.
Paper Source
Tray [x] (1*)
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set the paper source for the print job.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)*
Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence, particularly when printing
multiple copies of the job.
Sides
1‑Sided*
2‑Sided
Specify whether to print on one side or both sides of the paper.
Staple
O*
1 staple, top left corner
2 staples, left
1 staple, top right corner
2 staples, top
1 staple, bottom left corner
2 staples, bottom
1 staple, bottom right corner
2 staples, right
Specify the staple position for all print jobs.
Note: This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed.
Hole Punch
O*
2 holes
3 holes
Set the punch mode for all print jobs.
Note: This menu item appears only when a staple
finisher
is installed.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 139
Menu item Description
Oset Pages
None*
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Oset the output of each print job or each copy of a print job.
Notes:
• Between Copies osets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On
[1,2,1,2,1,2]. If Collate is set to O [1,1,1,2,2,2], then each set of printed pages
are oset, such as all page 1s and all page 2s.
• Between Jobs sets the same oset position for the entire print job
regardless of the number of copies printed.
• This menu item appears only when a staple finisher is installed.
Flip Style
Long Edge*
Short Edge
Determine which side of the paper is bound when performing two‑sided printing.
Pages per Side
O*
2 pages per side
3 pages per side
4 pages per side
6 pages per side
9 pages per side
12 pages per side
16 pages per side
Print multiple page images on one side of a sheet of paper.
Pages per Side Ordering
Horizontal*
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple page images when using Pages per Side menu.
Pages per Side Orientation
Auto*
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of multiple page images when using Pages per Side menu.
Pages per Side Border
None*
Solid
Print a border around each page image when using Pages per Side menu.
Separator Sheets
O*
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Insert blank separator sheets when printing.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x] (1*)
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 140
Menu item Description
Blank Pages
Do Not Print*
Print
Print blank pages in a print job.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Network/Ports
Network Overview
Menu item Description
Active Adapter
Auto*
Standard Network
Wireless
Specify the type of the network connection.
Note: Wireless is available only in printers connected to a wireless network.
Network Status Show the connectivity status of the printer network.
Display Network Status on
Printer
O
On*
Show the network status on the display.
Speed, Duplex Show the speed of the currently active network card.
IPv4 Show the IPv4 address.
All IPv6 Addresses Show all IPv6 addresses.
Reset Print Server Reset all active network connections to the printer.
Note: This setting removes all network configuration settings.
Network Job Timeout
O
On* (90 seconds)
Set the time before the printer cancels a network print job.
Banner Page
O*
On
Print a banner page.
Scan to PC Port Range Specify a valid port range for printers that are behind a port blocking firewall.
Enable Network Connections
O
On*
Enable the printer to connect to a network.
Enable LLDP
O*
On
Enable Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) in the printer.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 141
Wireless
Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to a Wi‑Fi network or printers that have a wireless
network adapter.
Menu item Description
Setup Using Mobile App Configure the Wi‑Fi connection using Lexmark Mobile Assistant.
Setup On Printer Panel
Choose Network
Add Wi‑Fi Network
Network Name
Network Mode
Infrastructure
Wireless Security Mode
Disabled*
WEP
WPA2/WPA - Personal
WPA2 - Personal
802.1x - RADIUS
Configure the Wi‑Fi connection using the control panel.
Note: 802.1x - RADIUS can be configured only from the Embedded
Web Server.
Wi
‑Fi Protected Setup
WPS Auto Detect
O
On*
Start Push Button Method
Start PIN Method
Establish a Wi‑Fi network and enable network security.
Notes:
• WPS Auto Detect appears only when the Wireless Security
Mode is set to WEP.
• Start Push-Button Method connects the printer to a Wi‑Fi
network when buttons on both the printer and the access point
(wireless router) are pressed within a given time.
• Start PIN Method connects the printer to a Wi‑Fi network when
a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the
access point.
Network Mode
BSS Type
Infrastructure*
Specify the network mode.
Compatibility
802.11b/g/n (2.4GHz)*
802.11a/b/g/n/ac (2.4GHz/5GHz)
802.11a/n/ac (5GHz)
Specify the standard for the Wi‑Fi network.
Note: 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (2.4GHz/5GHz) and 802.11a/n/ac (5GHz) only
appear when a Wi‑Fi option is installed.
Wireless Security Mode
Disabled*
WEP
WPA2/WPA-Personal
WPA2-Personal
802.1x - RADIUS
Set the security mode for connecting the printer to Wi‑Fi devices.
Note: 802.1x - RADIUS can be
configured
only from the Embedded
Web Server.
Understanding the printer menus 142
Menu item Description
WEP Authentication Mode
Auto*
Open
Shared
Set the type of Wireless Encryption Protocol (WEP) for the printer.
Note: This menu item appears only when the Wireless Security
Mode is set to WEP.
Set WEP Key Specify a WEP password for secure Wi‑Fi connection.
WPA2/WPA Personal
AES
Enable Wi‑Fi security through Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA).
Note: This menu item appears only when the Wireless Security
Mode is set to WPA2/WPA-Personal.
Set Pre
‑Shared Key Set the password for secure Wi‑Fi connection.
WPA2-Personal
AES
Enable Wi‑Fi security through WPA2.
Note: This menu item appears only when the Wireless Security
Mode is set to WPA2-Personal.
802.1x Encryption Mode
WPA+
WPA2*
Enable Wi‑Fi security through 802.1x standard.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only when the Wireless Security Mode
is set to 802.1x - RADIUS.
• 802.1x - RADIUS can be
configured
only from the Embedded
Web Server.
IPv4
Enable DHCP
On*
O
Set Static IP Address
IP Address
Netmask
Gateway
Enable and configure IPv4 settings in the printer.
IPv6
Enable IPv6
On*
O
Enable DHCPv6
On
O*
Stateless Address Autoconfiguration
On*
O
DNS Server Address
Manually Assigned IPv6 Address
Manually Assigned IPv6 Router
Address Prefix
All IPv6 Addresses
All IPv6 Router Addresses
Enable and configure IPv6 settings in the printer.
Understanding the printer menus 143
Menu item Description
Network Address
UAA
LAA
View the network addresses.
PCL SmartSwitch
O
On*
Set the printer to switch automatically to PCL emulation when a print
job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Note: If PCL SmartSwitch is
o,
then the printer does not examine
incoming data and uses the default printer language specified in
the Setup menu.
PS SmartSwitch
O
On*
Set the printer to switch automatically to PS emulation when a print
job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Note: If PS SmartSwitch is o, then the printer does not examine
incoming data and uses the default printer language specified in
the Setup menu.
Job Buering
On
O*
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.
Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Mac Binary PS
Auto*
On
O
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
• O filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
Wi‑Fi Direct
Menu item Description
Enable Wi‑Fi Direct
On
O*
Set the printer to connect directly to Wi-Fi devices.
Wi
‑Fi Direct Name Specify the name of the Wi‑Fi Direct network.
Wi
‑Fi Direct Password Set the password to authenticate and validate users on a Wi‑Fi connection.
Show Password on Setup Page
O
On*
Show the Wi‑Fi Direct Password on the Network Setup Page.
Preferred Channel Number
1–11
Auto*
Set the preferred channel of the Wi‑Fi network.
Group Owner IP Address Specify the IP address of the group owner.
Auto
‑Accept Push Button
Requests
O*
On
Accept requests to connect to the network automatically.
Note: Accepting clients automatically is not secured.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 144
Ethernet
Menu item Description
Network Speed Show the speed of the active network adapter.
IPv4
Enable DHCP (On*)
Set Static IP Address
Configure the IPv4 settings.
IPv6
Enable IPv6 (On*)
Enable DHCPv6
(O*)
Stateless Address Autoconfiguration (On*)
DNS Server Address
Manually Assigned IPv6 Address
Manually Assigned IPv6 Router
Address
Prefix
(64*)
All IPv6 Addresses
All IPv6 Router Addresses
Configure the IPv6 settings.
Network Address
UAA
LAA
Specify the network address.
PCL SmartSwitch
O
On*
Set the printer to switch automatically to PCL emulation when a print
job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Note: When this setting is disabled, the printer does not examine
incoming data and uses the default printer language specified in
the Setup menu.
PS SmartSwitch
O
On*
Set the printer to switch automatically to PostScript emulation when
a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Note: When this setting is disabled, the printer does not examine
incoming data and uses the default printer language specified in
the Setup menu.
Job Buering
O*
On
Temporarily store jobs on the hard disk before printing.
Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Mac Binary PS
Auto*
On
O
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
• Auto processes print jobs from computers using either
Windows or Macintosh operating systems.
•
O
filters
PostScript print jobs using the standard protocol.
Energy Ecient Ethernet
On
O
Auto*
Reduce power consumption when the printer does not receive data
from the Ethernet network.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 145
TCP/IP
Note: This menu appears only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
Menu item Description
Set Hostname Set the current TCP/IP host name.
Domain Name Set the domain name.
Allow DHCP/BOOTP to update
NTP server
On*
O
Allow the DHCP and BOOTP clients to update the NTP settings of the printer.
Zero Configuration Name Specify a service name for the zero configuration network.
Enable Auto IP
O*
On
Assign an IP address automatically.
DNS Server Address Specify the current Domain Name System (DNS) server address.
Backup DNS Address Specify the backup DNS server addresses.
Backup DNS Address 2
Backup DNS Address 3
Domain Search Order Specify a list of domain names to locate the printer and its resources that reside
in dierent domains on the network.
Enable DDNS
O*
On
Update the Dynamic DNS settings.
DDNS TTL Specify the current DDNS settings.
Default TTL
DDNS Refresh Time
Enable mDNS
O
On*
Update the multicast DNS settings.
WINS Server Address Specify a server address for Windows Internet Name Service (WINS).
Enable BOOTP
O*
On
Allow the BOOTP to assign a printer IP address.
Restricted Server List Specify the IP addresses that are allowed to communicate with the printer over
TCP/IP.
Notes:
• Use a comma to separate each IP address.
• You can add up to 50 IP addresses.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 146
Menu item Description
Restricted Server List Options
Block All Ports*
Block Printing Only
Block Printing and HTTP Only
Specify the access option for IP addresses that are not in the list.
MTU
256–1500 Ethernet (1500*)
Specify a maximum transmission unit (MTU) parameter for the TCP connections.
Raw Print Port
1–65535 (9100*)
Specify a raw port number for printers connected on a network.
Outbound Trac Maximum
Speed
O*
On
Set the maximum transfer rate of the printer.
Note: When enabled, the option for this setting is 100–1000000
Kilobits/second.
Enable TLSv1.0
O
On*
Enable the TLSv1.0 protocol.
Enable TLSv1.1
O
On*
Enable the TLSv1.1 protocol.
SSL Cipher List Specify the cipher algorithms to use for the SSL or the TLS connections.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
SNMP
Note: This menu appears only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Menu item Description
SNMP Versions 1 and 2c
Enabled
O
On*
Allow SNMP Set
O
On*
Enable PPM MIB
O
On*
SNMP Community
Configure Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) versions 1
and 2c to install print drivers and applications.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 147
Menu item Description
SNMP Version 3
Enabled
O
On*
Context Name
Set Read/Write Credentials
User Name
Authentication Password
Privacy Password
Set Read‑only Credentials
User Name
Authentication Password
Privacy Password
Authentication Hash
MD5
SHA1*
Minimum Authentication Level
No Authentication, No Privacy
Authentication, No Privacy
Authentication, Privacy*
Privacy Algorithm
DES
AES‑128*
Configure SNMP version 3 to install and update the printer security.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
IPSec
Note: This menu appears only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Menu item Description
Enable IPSec
O
On*
Enable Internet Protocol Security (IPSec).
Base Configuration
Default*
Compatibility
Secure
Set the IPSec base configuration.
DH (Die
‑Hellman) Group Proposal
modp2048 (14)*
modp3072 (15)
modp4096 (16)
modp6144 (17)
Set the IPSec base configuration.
Note: This menu item appears only when Base
Configuration
is set
to Compatibility.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 148
Menu item Description
Proposed Encryption Method
3DES
AES*
Set the encryption method.
Note: This menu item appears only when Base
Configuration
is set
to Compatibility.
Proposed Authentication Method
SHA1
SHA256*
SHA512
Set the authentication method.
Note: This menu item appears only when Base Configuration is set
to Compatibility.
IKE SA Lifetime (Hours)
1
2
4
8
24*
Specify the IKE SA expiry period.
Note: This menu item appears only when Base Configuration is set
to Secure.
IPSec SA Lifetime (Hours)
1
2
4
8*
24
Specify the IPSec SA expiry period.
Note: This menu item appears only when Base
Configuration
is set
to Secure.
IPSec Device Certificate Specify an IPSec certificate.
Pre
‑Shared Key Authenticated
Connections
Host [x]
Configure the authenticated connections of the printer.
Certificate Authenticated Connections
Host [x] Address[/subnet]
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
802.1x
Note: This menu appears only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Menu item Description
Active
O*
On
Let the printer join networks that require authentication before
allowing access.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
LPD Configuration
Note: This menu appears only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Understanding the printer menus 149
Menu item Description
LPD Timeout
0–65535 seconds (90*)
Set the time‑out value to stop the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) server
from waiting indefinitely for hung or invalid print jobs.
LPD Banner Page
O*
On
Print a banner page for all LPD print jobs.
Note: A banner page is the first page of a print job used as a
separator of print jobs and to identify the originator of the print job
request.
LPD Trailer Page
O*
On
Print a trailer page for all LPD print jobs.
Note: A trailer page is the last page of a print job.
LPD Carriage Return Conversion
O*
On
Enable carriage return conversion.
Note: Carriage return is a mechanism that commands the printer to
move the position of the cursor to the first position on the same
line.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
HTTP/FTP Settings
Menu item Description
Enable HTTP Server
O
On*
Access the Embedded Web Server to monitor and manage the printer.
Enable HTTPS
O
On*
Enable Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS) to encrypt data transferring
to and from the print server.
Force HTTPS Connections
On
O*
Force the printer to use HTTPS connections.
Enable FTP/TFTP
O
On*
Send files using FTP/TFTP.
Local Domains Specify domain names for HTTP and FTP servers.
HTTP Proxy IP Address Configure the HTTP and FTP server settings.
FTP Proxy IP Address
HTTP Default IP Port
HTTPS Device Certificate
FTP Default IP Port
Timeout for HTTP/FTP
Requests
1–299 (30*)
Specify the amount of time before the server connection stops.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 150
Menu item Description
Retries for HTTP/FTP Requests
1–299 (3*)
Set the number of retries to connect to the HTTP/FTP server.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
ThinPrint
Menu item Description
Enable ThinPrint
O*
On
Print using ThinPrint.
Port Number
4000–4999 (4000*)
Set the port number for the ThinPrint server.
Bandwidth (bits/sec)
100–1000000 (0*)
Set the speed to transmit data in a ThinPrint environment.
Packet Size (kbytes)
0–64000 (0*)
Set the packet size for data transmission.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
USB
Menu item Description
PCL SmartSwitch
O
On*
Set the printer to switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires
it, regardless of the default printer language.
Note: When this setting is disabled, the printer does not examine incoming data and uses the
default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
PS SmartSwitch
O
On*
Set the printer to switch to PostScript emulation when a print job received through a USB port
requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Note: When this setting is disabled, the printer does not examine incoming data and uses the
default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
Job Buering
O*
On
Temporarily store jobs on the hard disk before printing.
Note: This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Mac Binary PS
Auto*
On
O
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
• Auto processes print jobs from computers using either Windows or Macintosh operating
systems.
• O filters PostScript print jobs using the standard protocol.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 151
Menu item Description
Enable USB Port
O
On*
Enable the front USB drive port.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Restrict external network access
Menu item Description
Restrict external network
access
O*
On
Restrict access to network sites.
External network address Specify the network addresses with restricted access.
E
‑mail address for notification Specify an e‑mail address to send a notification of logged events.
Ping frequency
1–300 (10*)
Specify the network query interval in seconds.
Subject Specify the subject and message of the notification e‑mail.
Message
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 152
Security
Login Methods
Manage Permissions
Menu item Description
Function Access
Access Address Book in Apps
Modify Address Book
Manage Shortcuts
Create Profiles
Manage Bookmarks
Flash Drive Print
Flash Drive Scan
Copy Function
Color Dropout
E‑mail Function
Fax Function
FTP Function
Release Held Faxes
Held Jobs Access
User Profiles
Cancel Jobs at the Device
Change Language
Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)
Initiate Scans Remotely
B/W Print
Network Folder ‑ Scan
Control access to the printer functions.
Administrative Menus
Security Menu
Network/Ports Menu
Paper Menu
Reports Menu
Function Configuration Menus
Supplies Menu
Option Card Menu
SE Menu
Device Menu
Control access to the printer menu settings.
Understanding the printer menus 153
Menu item Description
Device Management
Remote Management
Firmware Updates
Apps Configuration
Operator Panel Lock
Import/Export All Settings
Out of Service Erase
Embedded Web Server Access
Control access to the printer management options.
Apps
New Apps
Slideshow
Change Wallpaper
Screen Saver
Card Copy
Scan Center
Scan Center Custom 1
Scan Center Custom 2
Scan Center Custom 3
Scan Center Custom 4
Scan Center Custom 5
Scan Center Custom 6
Scan Center Custom 7
Scan Center Custom 8
Scan Center Custom 9
Scan Center Custom 10
Forms and Favorites
Control access to printer applications.
Local Accounts
Menu item Description
Manage Groups/Permissions Show a list of all saved groups in the printer.
Add User
User Name/Password
User Name
Password
PIN
Create local accounts and specify their access to the printer functions,
administrative menus, printer management options, and applications.
Schedule USB Devices
Menu item Description
Schedules
Add New Schedule
Schedule access to the front USB port.
Understanding the printer menus 154
Security Audit Log
Menu item Description
Enable Audit
O*
On
Record the events in the secure audit log and remote syslog.
Enable Remote Syslog
O*
On
Send audit logs to a remote server.
Remote Syslog Server Specify the remote syslog server.
Remote Syslog Port
1–65535 (514*)
Specify the remote syslog port.
Remote Syslog Method
Normal UDP*
Stunnel
Specify a syslog method to transmit logged events to a remote server.
Remote Syslog Facility
0 ‑ Kernel Messages
1 ‑ User‑Level Messages
2 ‑ Mail System
3 ‑ System Daemons
4 ‑ Security/Authorization
Messages*
5 ‑ Messages Generated
Internally by Syslogs
6 ‑ Line Printer Subsystem
7 ‑ Network News Subsystem
8 ‑ UUCP Subsystem
9 ‑ Clock Daemon
10 ‑ Security/Authorization
Messages
11 ‑ FTP Daemon
12 ‑ NTP Subsystem
13 ‑ Log Audit
14 ‑ Log Alert
15 ‑ Clock Daemon
16 ‑ Local Use 0 (local0)
17‑ Local Use 1 (local1)
18 ‑ Local Use 2 (local2)
19 ‑ Local Use 3 (local3)
20 ‑ Local Use 4 (local4)
21 ‑ Local Use 5 (local5)
22 ‑ Local Use 6 (local6)
23 ‑ Local Use 7 (local7)
Specify a facility code that the printer uses when sending log events to a remote
server.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 155
Menu item Description
Severity of Events to Log
0 ‑ Emergency
1 ‑ Alert
2 ‑ Critical
3 ‑ Error
4 ‑ Warning*
5 ‑ Notice
6 ‑ Informational
7 ‑ Debug
Specify the priority level cuto for logging messages and events.
Remote Syslog Non
‑Logged
Events
O*
On
Send all events, regardless of severity level, to the remote server.
Admin’s E
‑mail Address Send e‑mail notification of logged events to the administrator.
E
‑mail Log Cleared Alert
O*
On
Send e‑mail notification to the administrator when a log entry is deleted.
E
‑mail Log Wrapped Alert
O*
On
Send e‑mail notification to the administrator when the log becomes full and
begins to overwrite the oldest entries.
Log Full Behavior
Wrap Over Older Entries*
E‑mail Log Then Delete All
Entries
Resolve log storage issues when the log fills its allotted memory.
E
‑mail % Full Alert
O*
On
Send e‑mail notification to the administrator when the log fills its allotted
memory.
% Full Alert Level
1–99 (90*)
E
‑mail Log Exported Alert
O*
On
Send e‑mail notification to the administrator when a log is exported.
E
‑mail Log Settings Changed
Alert
O*
On
Send e‑mail notification to the administrator when Enable Audit is set.
Log Line Endings
LF (\n)*
CR (\r)
CRLF (\r\n)
Specify how the log file terminates the end of each line.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 156
Menu item Description
Digitally Sign Exports
O*
On
Add a digital signature to each exported log file.
Clear Log Delete all audit logs.
Export Log
Syslog (RFC 5424)
Syslog (RFC 3164)
CSV
Export a security log to a flash drive.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Login Restrictions
Menu item Description
Login failures
1–10 (3*)
Specify the number of failed login attempts before the user gets locked out.
Failure time frame
1–60 minutes (5*)
Specify the time frame between failed login attempts before the user gets locked out.
Lockout time
1–60 minutes (5*)
Specify the lockout duration.
Web Login Timeout
1–120 minutes (10*)
Specify the delay for a remote login before the user is logged o automatically.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Confidential Print Setup
Menu item Description
Max Invalid PIN
2–10
Set the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Notes:
• A value of zero turns o this setting.
• When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are
deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration
O*
1 Hour
4 Hours
24 Hours
1 Week
Set the expiration time for confidential print jobs.
Notes:
• If this menu item is changed while confidential print jobs reside in the printer
memory or hard disk, then the expiration time for those print jobs does not
change to the new default value.
• If the printer is turned o, then all confidential jobs held in the printer memory
are deleted.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 157
Menu item Description
Repeat Job Expiration
O*
1 Hour
4 Hours
24 Hours
1 Week
Set the expiration time for a print job that you want to repeat.
Verify Job Expiration
O*
1 Hour
4 Hours
24 Hours
1 Week
Set the expiration time that the printer prints a copy for the user to examine its quality,
before printing the remaining copies.
Reserve Job Expiration
O*
1 Hour
4 Hours
24 Hours
1 Week
Set the expiration time that the printer stores print jobs for printing later.
Require All Jobs to be Held
O*
On
Set the printer to hold all print jobs.
Keep duplicate documents
O*
On
Set the printer to print other documents with the same file name without overwriting
any of the print jobs.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Disk Encryption
Note: This menu appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Menu item Description
Status
Enabled
Disabled
Enable disk encryption.
Start encryption
Understanding the printer menus 158
Erase Temporary Data Files
Menu item Description
Stored in onboard memory
O*
On
Delete all files stored on the printer memory.
Stored on hard disk
1 Pass Erase*
3 Pass Erase
7 Pass Erase
Delete all files stored on the printer hard disk.
Note: This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Solutions LDAP Settings
Menu item Description
Follow LDAP Referrals
O*
On
Search the dierent servers in the domain for the logged-in user account.
LDAP Certificate Verification
Ye s
No*
Enable verification of LDAP certificates.
Miscellaneous
Menu item Description
Protected Features
Show*
Hide
Show all the features that Function Access Control (FAC) protects regardless
of the security permission that the user has.
Note: Hide displays only FAC‑protected features that the user has access.
Print Permission
O*
On
Let the user log in before printing.
Default Print Permission Login
User Name/Password*
User Name
Set the default login for Print Permission.
Security Reset Jumper
Enable “Guest” access*
No
Eect
Specify user access to the printer.
Notes:
• The jumper is located beside a lock icon on the controller board.
• Enable “Guest” access provides anyone access to all aspects of the
printer.
• No Eect may make access to the printer impossible when the required
security information is unavailable.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 159
Menu item Description
Minimum Password Length
0–32
Specify the password length.
Enable Password/PIN Reveal Show the password or personal identification number.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.
Reports
Menu Settings Page
Menu item Description
Menu Settings Page Print a report that contains the printer menus.
Device
Menu item Description
Device Information Print a report that contains information about the printer.
Device Statistics Print a report about printer usage and supply status.
Profile List Print a list of profiles that are stored in the printer.
Asset Report Print a report that contains the printer serial number and model name.
Print
Menu item Description
Print Fonts
PCL Fonts
PS Fonts
Print samples and information about the fonts that are available in each printer
language.
Print Demo
Demo Page
Print a page that shows the printer capabilities and supported solutions.
Print Directory Print the resources that are stored in the flash drive or printer hard disk.
Note: This menu item appears only when a
flash
drive or printer hard disk is
installed.
Understanding the printer menus 160
Shortcuts
Menu item Description
All Shortcuts Print a report that lists the shortcuts that are stored in the printer.
Fax Shortcuts
Copy Shortcuts
E
‑mail Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Network Folder Shortcuts
Fax
Note: This menu appears only if Fax is
configured,
and Enable Job Log is set to On.
Menu item Description
Fax Job Log Print a report about the last 200 completed fax jobs.
Fax Call Log Print a report about the last 100 attempted, received, and blocked calls.
Network
Menu item Description
Network Setup Page Print a page that shows the configured network and wireless settings on the
printer.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected
to print servers.
Wi
‑Fi Direct Connected Clients Print a page that shows the list of devices that are connected to the printer using
Wi‑Fi Direct.
Note: This menu item appears only when Enable Wi‑Fi Direct is set to On.
Help
Menu item Description
Print All Guides Prints all the guides
Connection Guide Provides information about connecting the printer locally (USB) or to a
network
Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and configuring the settings
E‑mail Guide Provides information about sending e‑mails and configuring the settings
Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes and configuring the settings
FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents and configuring the settings
Information Guide Provides more information sources about the printer
Understanding the printer menus 161
Menu item Description
Media Guide Provides information about loading paper and specialty media
Mono Quality Guide Provides information about mono print quality settings
Moving Guide Provides information about moving, locating, or shipping the printer
Print Quality Guide Provides information about solving print quality issues
Supplies Guide Provides information about ordering supplies
Troubleshooting
Menu item Description
Print Quality Test Pages Print sample pages to identify and correct print quality defects.
Cleaning the Scanner Print instructions on how to clean the scanner.
Printing the Menu Settings Page
From the home screen, touch Settings > Reports > Menu Settings Page.
Understanding the printer menus 162
Securing the printer
Locating the security slot
The printer is equipped with a security lock feature. Attach a security lock compatible with most laptop
computers in the location shown to secure the printer in place.
Erasing printer memory
To erase volatile memory or buered data in your printer, turn o the printer.
To erase nonvolatile memory or individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and
embedded solutions, do the following:
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Maintenance > Out of Service Erase.
2 Select the Sanitize all information on nonvolatile memory check box, and then touch ERASE.
3 Select Start initial setup wizard or Leave printer
oine
, and then touch Next.
4 Start the operation.
Erasing printer hard disk memory
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Maintenance > Out of Service Erase.
2 Select the Sanitize all information on hard disk check box, and then touch ERASE.
3 Select a method to erase data.
4 Start the operation.
Note: This process can take from several minutes to more than an hour, making the printer unavailable for
other tasks.
Securing the printer 163
Encrypting the printer hard disk
This process erases all contents in the hard disk. If necessary, back up important data from the printer before
starting the encryption.
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Security > Disk Encryption > Start encryption.
2 Follow the instructions on the display.
Notes:
• To avoid loss of data, do not turn o the printer during the encryption process.
• This process can take from several minutes to more than an hour, making the printer unavailable for
other tasks.
• After encryption, the printer automatically restarts.
Restoring factory default settings
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Restore Factory Defaults.
2 To uc h Restore Settings > select the settings that you want to restore > RESTORE.
3 Start the operation.
Statement of Volatility
Type of memory Description
Volatile memory The printer uses standard random access memory (RAM)
to buer temporarily user data during simple print and
copy jobs.
Non-volatile memory The printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used
to store the operating system, printer settings, network
information, scanner and bookmark settings, and
embedded solutions.
Hard disk memory Some printers may have a hard disk drive installed. The
printer hard disk is designed for printer-specific
functionality. The hard disk lets the printer retain buered
user data from complex print jobs, form data, and font
data.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
• The printer is decommissioned.
• The printer hard disk is replaced.
• The printer is moved to a dierent department or location.
• The printer is serviced by someone from outside your organization.
• The printer is removed from your premises for service.
• The printer is sold to another organization.
Securing the printer 164
Disposing of a printer hard disk
• Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
• Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
• Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: To guarantee that all data are completely erased, destroy physically each hard disk where data is
stored.
Securing the printer 165
Maintaining the printer
Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and
supplies, may cause damage to your printer.
Configuring supply notifications
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Device > Notifications.
3 From the Supplies menu, click Custom Supply Notifications.
4 Select a notification for each supply item.
5 Apply the changes.
Setting up e
‑mail alerts
Configure the printer to send e‑mail alerts when supplies are low, when paper must be changed or added, or
when there is a paper jam.
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Device > Notifications > E
‑mail Alert Setup, and then configure the settings.
Note: For more information on SMTP settings, contact your e‑mail provider.
3 Click Setup E-mail Lists and Alerts, and then
configure
the settings.
4 Apply the changes.
Viewing reports
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Reports.
2 Select the report that you want to view.
Maintaining the printer 166
Adjusting the speaker volume
Adjusting the default headphone volume
1 From the control panel, navigate to:
Settings > Device > Accessibility
2 Adjust the headphone volume.
Note: The volume resets to the default value after the session is logged out or when the printer wakes
from Sleep or Hibernate mode.
Configuring
the fax speaker settings
Note: Make sure that fax is configured. For more information, see
“Setting up the printer to fax” on page 64.
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Speaker Settings.
2 Do the following:
• Set Speaker Mode to Always On.
• Set Speaker Volume to High.
• Enable Ringer Volume.
Networking
Connecting the printer to a Wi
‑Fi network
Make sure that Active Adapter is set to Auto. From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Network
Overview > Active Adapter.
Using the control panel
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless > Setup On Printer Panel > Choose
Network.
2 Select a Wi‑Fi network, and then type the network password.
Note: For Wi‑Fi‑network‑ready printer models, a prompt for Wi‑Fi network setup appears during initial
setup.
Using Lexmark Mobile Assistant
1 Depending on your mobile device, download the Lexmark Mobile Assistant application from either the
Google Play store or App Store online store.
2 From the printer home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless > Setup Using Mobile App >
Printer ID.
3 From your mobile device, launch the application, and then accept the Terms of Use.
Note: If necessary, grant permissions.
Maintaining the printer 167
4 Tap Connect to Printer > Go to Wi‑Fi Settings.
5 Connect your mobile device to the printer wireless network.
6 Return to the application, and then tap Setup Wi-Fi Connection
7 Select a Wi-Fi network, and then type the network password.
8 Tap Done.
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
(WPS)
Before you begin, make sure that:
• The access point (wireless router) is WPS‑
certified
or WPS‑compatible. For more information, see the
documentation that came with your access point.
• A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer. For more information, see the instructions that came
with the adapter.
• Active Adapter is set to Auto. From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Network Overview
> Active Adapter.
Using the Push Button method
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless > Wi
‑Fi Protected Setup > Start Push
Button Method.
2 Follow the instructions on the display.
Using the personal identification number (PIN) method
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless > Wi
‑Fi Protected Setup > Start PIN
Method.
2 Copy the eight‑digit WPS PIN.
3 Open a web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address
field.
Notes:
• To know the IP address, see the documentation that came with your access point.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
4 Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
5 Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the changes.
Maintaining the printer 168
Configuring Wi‑Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct
®
is a Wi-Fi-based peer-to-peer technology that allows wireless devices to connect directly to a Wi-
Fi Direct‑enabled printer without using an access point (wireless router).
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wi-Fi Direct.
2 Configure the settings.
• Enable Wi‑Fi Direct—Enables the printer to broadcast its own Wi‑Fi Direct network.
• Wi
‑Fi Direct Name—Assigns a name for the Wi‑Fi Direct network.
• Wi
‑Fi Direct Password—Assigns the password for negotiating the wireless security when using the
peer‑to-peer connection.
• Show Password on Setup Page—Shows the password on the Network Setup Page.
• Auto-Accept Push Button Requests—Lets the printer accept connection requests automatically.
Note: Accepting push‑button requests automatically is not secured.
Note: To know the password of the Wi-Fi Direct network, print the Network Setup Page. From the home
screen, touch Settings > Reports > Network > Network Setup Page.
Connecting a mobile device to the printer
Before connecting your mobile device, make sure that Wi‑Fi Direct has been configured. For more information,
see
“Configuring Wi‑Fi Direct” on page 169.
Connecting using Wi
‑Fi Direct
Note: These instructions apply only to Android mobile devices.
1 From the mobile device, go to the settings menu.
2 Enable Wi‑Fi, and then tap Wi‑Fi Direct.
3 Select the printer Wi-Fi Direct name.
4
Confirm
the connection on the printer control panel.
Connecting using Wi
‑Fi
1 From the mobile device, go to the settings menu.
2 Tap Wi
‑Fi, and then select the printer Wi-Fi Direct name.
Note: The string DIRECT-xy (where x and y are two random characters) is added before the Wi-Fi Direct
name.
3 Enter the Wi-Fi Direct password.
Connecting a computer to the printer
Before connecting your computer, make sure to do the following:
• Enable Wi‑Fi Direct in the printer. From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wi-Fi Direct >
Enable Wi
‑Fi Direct > On.
• Take note of the Wi‑Fi Direct name. From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wi-Fi Direct
> Wi-Fi Direct Name.
Maintaining the printer 169
• Take note of the Wi‑Fi Direct password. From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wi-Fi
Direct > Wi-Fi Direct Password.
Note: You can also configure the Wi‑Fi Direct name and password.
For Windows users
1 Open Printers & scanners, and then click Add a printer or scanner.
2 Click Show Wi-Fi Direct printers, and then select the printer Wi‑Fi Direct name.
3 From the printer display, take note of the eight-digit PIN of the printer.
4 Enter the PIN on the computer.
Note: If the print driver is not already installed, then Windows downloads the appropriate driver.
For Macintosh users
1 Click the wireless icon, and then select the printer Wi‑Fi Direct name.
Note: The string DIRECT-xy (where x and y are two random characters) is added before the Wi-Fi Direct
name.
2 Type the Wi‑Fi Direct password.
Note: Switch your computer back to its previous network after disconnecting from the Wi-Fi Direct
connection.
Deactivating the Wi
‑Fi network
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Network Overview > Active Adapter > Standard
Network.
2 Follow the instructions on the display.
Changing the printer port settings after installing an internal solutions port
Notes:
• If the printer has a static IP address, then do not change the configuration.
• If the computers are configured to use the network name instead of an IP address, then do not change
the configuration.
• If you are adding a wireless internal solutions port (ISP) to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet
connection, then disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network.
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
2 From the shortcut menu of the printer with the new ISP, open the printer properties.
3 Configure the port from the list.
4 Update the IP address.
5 Apply the changes.
Maintaining the printer 170
For Macintosh users
1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to the list of printers, and then select + > IP.
2 Type the IP address in the address
field.
3 Apply the changes.
Setting up serial printing (Windows only)
1 Set the parameters in the printer.
a From the control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.
b Locate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
c Apply the changes.
2 From your computer, open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
3 Open the printer properties, and then select the COM port from the list.
4 Set the COM port parameters in Device Manager.
Notes:
• Serial printing reduces printing speed.
• Make sure that the serial cable is connected to the serial port on your printer.
Cleaning printer parts
Cleaning the printer
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
Notes:
• Perform this task after every few months.
• Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty.
1 Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3 Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4 Wipe the outside of the printer with a damp, soft, lint‑free cloth.
Notes:
• Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of the printer.
Maintaining the printer 171
• Make sure that all areas of the printer are dry after cleaning.
5 Connect the power cord to the electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
Cleaning the touch screen
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
1 Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
2 Using a damp, soft, lint‑free cloth, wipe the touch screen.
Notes:
• Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the touch screen.
• Make sure that the touch screen is dry after cleaning.
3 Connect the power cord to the electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of
fire
or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
Cleaning the scanner
1 Open the scanner cover.
Maintaining the printer 172
2 Using a damp, soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the following areas:
• ADF glass
• ADF glass pad
• Scanner glass
• Scanner glass pad
Maintaining the printer 173
3 Open door E.
4 Using a damp, soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the following areas:
• ADF glass pad in door E
• ADF glass in door E
5 Close door E, and then close the scanner cover.
Maintaining the printer 174
Cleaning the pick tires
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Remove the tray.
Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal
frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.
3 Remove the pick roller.
4 Using a damp, soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the pick tires.
Note: Apply isopropyl alcohol to the cloth.
Maintaining the printer 175
5 Insert the pick roller.
6 Insert the tray.
Cleaning the pick roller in the multipurpose feeder
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Open the multipurpose feeder.
Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal
frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.
Maintaining the printer 176
3 Remove the pick roller.
4 Apply isopropyl alcohol to a soft, lint-free cloth, and then wipe the pick roller.
Maintaining the printer 177
5 Insert the pick roller.
6 Close the multipurpose feeder.
7 Turn on the printer.
Maintaining the printer 178
Cleaning the ADF pick roller
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Open door D.
3 Remove the ADF pick roller cover.
4 Remove the ADF pick roller.
Warning—Potential Damage: Some parts of the printer are easily damaged by static electricity. Before
touching any parts or components in an area marked with the static‑sensitive symbol, touch a metal
surface in an area away from the symbol.
Maintaining the printer 179
5 Apply isopropyl alcohol to a soft, lint-free cloth, and then wipe the ADF pick roller..
6 Insert the ADF pick roller until it clicks into place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Some parts of the printer are easily damaged by static electricity. Before
touching any parts or components in an area marked with the static‑sensitive symbol, touch a metal
surface in an area away from the symbol.
Maintaining the printer 180
7 Insert the ADF pick roller cover until it clicks into place.
8 Close door D.
9 Turn on the printer.
Cleaning the ADF feed roller
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Open door D.
Maintaining the printer 181
3 Remove the ADF pick roller cover.
4 Remove the ADF feed roller.
Warning—Potential Damage: Some parts of the printer are easily damaged by static electricity. Before
touching any parts or components in an area marked with the static‑sensitive symbol, touch a metal
surface in an area away from the symbol.
5 Apply isopropyl alcohol to a soft, lint-free cloth, and then wipe the ADF feed roller.
Maintaining the printer 182
6 Insert the ADF feed roller until it clicks into place.
Maintaining the printer 183
7 Insert the ADF pick roller cover until it clicks into place.
8 Close door D.
9 Turn on the printer.
Emptying the hole punch box
1 Open door J.
Maintaining the printer 184
2 Remove and empty the hole punch box.
3 Insert the hole punch box.
4 Close door J.
Maintaining the printer 185
Ordering parts and supplies
To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark
authorized supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, go to
www.lexmark.com or contact the
place where you purchased the printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.
Checking the status of parts and supplies
1 From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies.
2 Select the parts or supplies that you want to check.
Note: You can also access this setting by touching the top section of the home screen.
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark parts and supplies. Use of third-party
supplies or parts may aect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. It can
also aect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party parts and supplies is not covered by
the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark parts and supplies, and may deliver
unpredictable results if third-party parts and supplies are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended
life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.
Warning—Potential Damage: Supplies and parts without Return Program agreement terms may be reset and
remanufactured. However, the manufacturer’s warranty does not cover any damage caused by non-genuine
supplies or parts. Resetting counters on the supply or part without proper remanufacturing can cause
damage to your printer. After resetting the supply or part counter, your printer may display an error indicating
the presence of the reset item.
Ordering a toner cartridge
Notes:
• The estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19752 standard.
• Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively aect actual yield.
Return Program toner cartridges
Item United
States and
Canada
European
Economic
Area
Asia Pacific Latin
America
Rest of
Europe,
Middle East,
and Africa
Australia
and New
Zealand
Worldwide
Return
Program
toner
cartridge
58D1000 58D2000 58D3000 58D4000 58D5000 58D6000 58D000G
1
Available only for contract‑managed printers. For more information, contact your Lexmark representative or system
administrator.
Maintaining the printer 186
Item United
States and
Canada
European
Economic
Area
Asia Pacific Latin
America
Rest of
Europe,
Middle East,
and Africa
Australia
and New
Zealand
Worldwide
High yield
Return
Program
toner
cartridge
58D1H00 58D2H00 58D3H00 58D4H00 58D5H00 58D6H00 58D0H0G
High yield
Corporate
Return
Program
toner
cartridge
1
58D1H0E 58D2H0E 58D3H0E 58D4H0E 58D5H0E 58D6H0E N/A
Extra high
yield Return
Program
toner
cartridge
58D1X00 58D2X00 58D3X00 58D4X00 58D5X00 58D6X00 58D0X0G
Extra high
yield
Corporate
Return
Program
toner
cartridge
1
58D1X0E 58D2X0E 58D3X0E 58D4X0E 58D5X0E 58D6X0E N/A
Ultra high
yield Return
Program
toner
cartridge
58D1U00 58D2U00 58D3U00 58D4U00 58D5U00 58D6U00 58D0U0G
Ultra high
yield
Corporate
Return
Program
toner
cartridge
1
58D1U0E 58D2U0E 58D3U0E 58D4U0E 58D5U0E 58D6U0E N/A
1
Available only for contract‑managed printers. For more information, contact your Lexmark representative or system
administrator.
Maintaining the printer 187
Lexmark XM7355 and XM7370 Return Program toner cartridges
Item United States,
Canada, Australia,
and New Zealand
Europe, Middle East,
and Africa
Asia Pacific Latin America
Return Program toner
cartridge
25B3086
1
25B3090
2
25B3101
1
25B3107
2
25B3121
1
25B3122
2
25B3128
1
25B3129
2
1
Supported only in the Lexmark XM7355 printer model.
2
Supported only in the Lexmark XM7370 printer model.
Regular toner cartridges
Item Worldwide
Ultra high yield toner cartridge 58D0UA0
Ordering an imaging unit
Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail before the toner
exhaustion.
Item Lexmark Return Program
Corporate Return Program
*
Regular
Imaging unit 58D0Z00 58D0Z0E 58D0ZA0
* This imaging unit is available only for contract‑managed printers. For more information, contact your Lexmark
representative or system administrator.
Ordering a staple cartridge
Part name Part number
Staple cartridge 35S8500
Ordering a maintenance kit
To identify the supported fuser type, open door A, and then remove the toner cartridge and the imaging unit.
Find the two‑digit fuser type in front of the fuser, for example, 00 or 01.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Notes:
• Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.
• The separator assembly, fuser, pick roller assembly, and transfer roller are included in the maintenance
kit and can be ordered individually and replaced if necessary.
• For more information on replacing the maintenance kit, see the documentation that came with the kit.
Maintaining the printer 188
Return Program fuser maintenance kits
Fuser maintenance kit
type
Part number
Type 00 41X2233
Type 01 41X2234
Type 02 41X2235
Type 03 41X2236
Type 04 41X2237
Type 11 41X2242
Type 13 41X2243
Type 32 41X2250
Type 33 41X2251
Type 35 41X2252
Type 36 41X2253
Regular fuser maintenance kits
Fuser maintenance kit
type
Part number
Type 05 41X2238
Type 06 41X2239
Type 07 41X2240
Type 08 41X2241
Type 17 41X2244
Type 19 41X2245
Roller maintenance kit
Item Part number
Printer engine roller
maintenance kit
41X2352
Automatic document feeder maintenance kit
Item Part number
ADF maintenance kit 41X2351
Maintaining the printer 189
Replacing parts and supplies
Replacing the toner cartridge
1 Open door A.
Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal
frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.
2 Remove the used toner cartridge.
3 Unpack the new toner cartridge, and then shake it to redistribute the toner.
Maintaining the printer 190
4 Insert the new toner cartridge.
5 Close the door.
Replacing the imaging unit
1 Open door A.
Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal
frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.
2 Remove the toner cartridge.
Maintaining the printer 191
3 Remove the used imaging unit.
4 Unpack the new imaging unit, and then shake it to redistribute the toner.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may
aect
the quality of
future print jobs.
5 Remove the packing material.
Maintaining the printer 192
6 Insert the new imaging unit.
7 Insert the toner cartridge.
8 Close the door.
Replacing the fuser
1 Open door C.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a
hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal
frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.
Maintaining the printer 193
2 Unlock the fuser.
3 Remove the used fuser.
4 Unpack the new fuser.
5 Insert the new fuser until it clicks into place.
Maintaining the printer 194
6 Lock the fuser.
7 Close the door.
Replacing the transfer roller
1 Open door A.
Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal
frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.
2 Remove the toner cartridge.
Maintaining the printer 195
3 Remove the imaging unit.
4 Remove the used transfer roller.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a
hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
5 Unpack the new transfer roller.
Maintaining the printer 196
6 Insert the new transfer roller until it clicks into place.
7 Insert the imaging unit.
8 Insert the toner cartridge.
9 Close the door.
Replacing the pick roller
1 Remove the tray.
Maintaining the printer 197
Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal
frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.
2 Remove the used pick roller.
3 Unpack the new pick roller.
4 Install the new pick roller.
5 Insert the tray.
Maintaining the printer 198
Replacing the pick roller in the multipurpose feeder
1 Open the multipurpose feeder.
Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal
frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.
2 Remove the used pick roller.
3 Unpack the new pick roller.
Maintaining the printer 199
4 Install the new pick roller.
5 Close the multipurpose feeder.
Replacing the ADF pick roller
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Open door D.
Maintaining the printer 200
Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal
frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.
3 Remove the ADF pick roller cover.
4 Remove the used ADF pick roller.
Maintaining the printer 201
5 Unpack the new ADF pick roller.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid damage and poor printer performance, handle this part with clean
hands.
6 Insert the new ADF pick roller until it clicks into place.
Maintaining the printer 202
7 Insert the ADF pick roller cover until it clicks into place.
8 Close the door.
9 Turn on the printer.
Replacing the ADF feed roller
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Open door D.
Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal
frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.
Maintaining the printer 203
3 Remove the ADF pick roller cover.
4 Remove the used ADF feed roller.
5 Unpack the new ADF feed roller.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid damage and poor printer performance, handle this part with clean
hands.
Maintaining the printer 204
6 Insert the new ADF feed roller until it clicks into place.
Maintaining the printer 205
7 Insert the ADF pick roller cover until it clicks into place.
8 Close the door.
9 Turn on the printer.
Replacing the ADF separator roller
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Open door D.
Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal
frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.
Maintaining the printer 206
3 Remove the ADF separator roller cover.
4 Remove the used ADF separator roller.
5 Unpack the new ADF separator roller.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid damage and poor printer performance, handle this part with clean
hands.
Maintaining the printer 207
6 Insert the new ADF separator roller until it clicks into place.
7 Insert the ADF separator roller cover until it clicks into place.
Maintaining the printer 208
8 Close the door.
9 Turn on the printer.
Replacing the ADF torque limiter
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Open door D.
Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal
frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.
3 Remove the ADF separator roller cover.
4 Remove the ADF separator roller.
Maintaining the printer 209
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid damage and poor printer performance, handle this part with clean
hands.
5 Remove the used ADF torque limiter.
6 Unpack the new ADF torque limiter.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid damage and poor printer performance, handle this part with clean
hands.
7 Insert the new ADF torque limiter.
Maintaining the printer 210
8 Insert the ADF separator roller until it clicks into place.
9 Insert the ADF separator roller cover until it clicks into place.
Maintaining the printer 211
10 Close the door.
11 Turn on the printer.
Replacing the staple cartridge in the staple finisher
1 Open door F.
2 Remove the staple cartridge holder.
Maintaining the printer 212
3 Remove the empty staple cartridge.
4 Insert the new staple cartridge.
5 Insert the staple cartridge holder.
6 Close the door.
Maintaining the printer 213
Replacing the staple cartridge in the staple, hole punch finisher
1 Depending on the staple cartridge to replace, open either door F or door G.
2 Remove the staple cartridge holder.
Maintaining the printer 214
3 Remove the empty staple cartridge.
4 Insert the new staple cartridge.
5 Insert the staple cartridge holder.
6 Close the door.
Resetting the supply usage counters
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Maintenance > Configuration Menu > Supply Usage
And Counters.
2 Select the counter that you want to reset.
Warning—Potential Damage: Supplies and parts without Return Program agreement terms may be reset and
remanufactured. However, the manufacturer’s warranty does not cover any damage caused by non-genuine
supplies or parts. Resetting counters on the supply or part without proper remanufacturing can cause
damage to your printer. After resetting the supply or part counter, your printer may display an error indicating
the presence of the reset item.
Moving the printer
Moving the printer to another location
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: If the printer weight is greater than 20 kg (44 lb), then it may require
two or more people to lift it safely.
Maintaining the printer 215
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, use only the power cord
provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: When moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal
injury or printer damage:
• Make sure that all doors and trays are closed.
• Turn
o
the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.
• If the printer has separate floor-standing optional trays or output options attached to it, then disconnect
them before moving the printer.
• If the printer has a caster base, then carefully roll it to the new location. Use caution when passing over
thresholds and breaks in flooring.
• If the printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays or output options, then remove
the output options and lift the printer o the trays. Do not try to lift the printer and any options at the same
time.
• Always use the handholds on the printer to lift it.
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
• Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the
options.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.
• Make sure that your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Make sure that there is adequate clearance around the printer.
Note: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty.
Shipping the printer
For shipping instructions, go to
http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support.
Saving energy and paper
Configuring
the power save mode settings
Sleep mode
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Power Management > Timeouts > Sleep Mode.
2 Specify the amount of time that the printer stays idle before it enters Sleep Mode.
Hibernate mode
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Power Management > Timeouts > Hibernate Timeout.
2 Select the amount of time that the printer stays idle before it enters Hibernate mode.
Maintaining the printer 216
Notes:
• For Hibernate Timeout to work, set Hibernate Timeout on Connection to Hibernate.
• The Embedded Web Server is disabled when the printer is in Hibernate mode.
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Preferences > Screen Brightness.
2 Adjust the setting.
Conserving supplies
• Print on both sides of the paper.
Note: Two-sided printing is the default setting in the print driver.
• Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
• Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before printing it.
• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Recycling
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:
1 Go to
www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Select the product you want to recycle.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark Collection and Recycling Program may be
recycled through your local recycling center.
Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are
transported in the most ecient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to
dispose of. These eciencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource
savings. Lexmark also oers recycling of packaging components in some countries or regions. For more
information, go to
www.lexmark.com/recycle, and then choose your country or region. Information on available
packaging recycling programs is included with the information on product recycling.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist
in your area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark recycles
the box.
Maintaining the printer 217
Clearing jams
Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
• Make sure that the paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper
• Do not load or remove a tray while the printer is printing.
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure that the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Do not slide paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
• Make sure that the paper guides are positioned correctly and are not pressing tightly against the paper or
envelopes.
• Push the tray
firmly
into the printer after loading paper.
Use recommended paper
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load paper that is wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled.
• Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.
Clearing jams 218
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
• Make sure that the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
• Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.
Identifying jam locations
Notes:
• When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer flushes blank pages or pages with partial prints after a jammed
page has been cleared. Check your printed output for blank pages.
• When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages.
Clearing jams 219
Jam locations
1 Automatic document feeder
2 Standard, finisher, or output option bin
3 Door A
4 Multipurpose feeder
5 Trays
6 Door C
7 Finisher or output option rear door
• Door H
• Door N
• Door P
Paper jam in trays
1 Remove the tray.
Warning—Potential Damage: A sensor inside the optional tray is easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface before removing the jammed paper in the tray.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
3 Insert the tray.
Clearing jams 220
Paper jam in door A
1 Open door A.
Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal
frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.
2 Remove the toner cartridge.
3 Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Clearing jams 221
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may aect the quality of
future print jobs.
4 Pull out the duplex unit.
5 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
6 Insert the duplex unit.
Clearing jams 222
7 Insert the imaging unit.
8 Insert the toner cartridge.
9 Close the door.
Paper jam in door C
1 Open door C.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a
hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal
frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.
2 Remove the jammed paper from any of the following areas:
Clearing jams 223
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
• Fuser area
• Below the fuser area
• Duplex area
3 Close the door.
Paper jam in the standard bin
Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 224
Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder
1 Remove paper from the multipurpose feeder.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
3 Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.
Clearing jams 225
4 Reload paper.
Paper jam in the automatic document feeder
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.
2 Open door D.
Warning—Potential Damage: To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge, touch any exposed metal
frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior areas of the printer.
3 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
4 Close door D.
Clearing jams 226
5 Open the scanner cover.
6 Open door E.
7 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
8 Close door E, and then close the scanner cover.
Clearing jams 227
Paper jam in the 4‑bin mailbox
Paper jam in door N
1 Open door N.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close the door.
Paper jam in the mailbox bin
Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 228
Paper jam in the oset stacker or staple finisher
Paper jam in door H
1 Open door H.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 229
3 Close the door.
Paper jam in the
oset
stacker or staple
finisher
bin
Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 230
Paper jam in the staple, hole punch finisher
Paper jam in door P
1 Open door P.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close the door.
Paper jam in the staple, hole punch finisher bin
Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 231
Staple jam in the staple finisher
1 Open door F.
Clearing jams 232
2 Remove the staple cartridge holder.
3 Remove the loose staples.
Clearing jams 233
4 Press the staples against the metal bracket.
Note: If the staples are at the rear of the cartridge, then shake the cartridge downward to bring the
staples near the metal bracket.
5 Insert the staple cartridge holder until it clicks into place.
6 Close the door.
Clearing jams 234
Staple jam in the staple, hole punch finisher
1 Depending on the staple jam location, open either door F or door G.
2 Remove the staple cartridge holder.
Clearing jams 235
3 Remove the loose staples.
4 Press the staples against the metal bracket.
Note: If the staples are at the rear of the cartridge, then shake the cartridge downward to bring the
staples near the metal bracket.
Clearing jams 236
5 Insert the staple cartridge holder until it clicks into place.
6 Close the door.
Clearing jams 237
Troubleshooting
Print quality problems
Find the image that resembles the print quality problem you are having, and then click the link below it to read
problem-solving steps.
“Blank or white pages” on
page 239
“Dark print” on page 241 “Fine lines are not printed
correctly” on page 242
“Folded or wrinkled paper”
on page 243
“Gray background” on
page 244
“Horizontal light bands”
on page 256
“Incorrect margins” on
page 246
“Light print” on page 247
“Mottled print and dots” on
page 249
“Paper curl” on page 276 “Print crooked or skewed”
on page 250
“Repeating defects” on
page 264
Troubleshooting 238
“Solid black pages” on
page 250
“Text or images cut o” on
page 253
“Toner easily rubs o” on
page 255
“Vertical dark bands” on
page 258
“Vertical dark lines or
streaks” on page 261
“Vertical dark streaks with
print missing” on
page 262
“Vertical light bands” on
page 256
“Vertical white lines” on
page 257
Printing problems
Print quality is poor
Blank or white pages
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
navigate through the settings.
Troubleshooting 239
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark
toner cartridge.
Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a
supported one.
b Print the document.
Is the printer printing blank or white pages?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Remove any packing material that is left on the imaging unit.
1 Remove the toner cartridge, and then remove the imaging
unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the
photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so
may aect the quality of future print jobs.
2 Check the imaging unit for signs of damage.
Note: Make sure that the photoconductor drum contact is
not bent or out of place.
3 Firmly shake the imaging unit to redistribute the toner.
4 Insert the imaging unit, and then insert the toner cartridge.
b Print the document.
Is the printer printing blank or white pages?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
Check the transfer roller for proper installation.
Is the transfer roller installed properly?
Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
Step 4
a Remove, and then insert the transfer roller.
b Print the document.
Is the printer printing blank or white pages?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
a Replace the imaging unit.
b Print the document.
Is the printer printing blank or white pages?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 240
Dark print
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to
navigate through the settings.
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark
toner cartridge.
Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a
supported one.
b Print the document.
Is the print dark?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Turn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on
the printer.
b Reduce toner darkness.
From the control panel, navigate to:
Settings > Print > Quality > Toner Darkness
c Print the document.
Is the print dark?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type
from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Notes:
• Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.
• You can also change the setting on the printer control
panel. Navigate to Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration
> Paper Size/Type.
b Print the document.
Is the print dark?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 241
Action Yes No
Step 4
Check if the paper has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
Go to step 5. Go to step 6.
Step 5
a Replace textured paper with plain paper.
b Print the document.
Is the print dark?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use it.
b Print the document.
Is the print dark?
Go to step 7. The problem is
solved.
Step 7
a Remove, and then insert the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the
photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may
aect the quality of future print jobs.
b Print the document.
Is the print dark?
Go to step 8. The problem is
solved.
Step 8
a Replace the imaging unit.
b Print the document.
Is the print dark?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Fine lines are not printed correctly
Troubleshooting 242
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to
navigate through the settings.
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark
toner cartridge.
Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a
supported one.
b Print the document.
Are fine lines not printed correctly?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Adjust the print quality settings.
1 From the control panel, navigate to:
Settings > Print > Quality > Pixel Boost > Fonts
2 Adjust Toner Darkness to 7. From the control panel, navigate
to:
Settings > Print > Quality
b Print the document.
Are fine lines not printed correctly?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Folded or wrinkled paper
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to
navigate through the settings.
Troubleshooting 243
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark
toner cartridge.
Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a
supported one.
b Print the document.
Is the paper folded or wrinkled?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use it.
b Print the document.
Is the paper folded or wrinkled?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type
from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Notes:
• Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.
• You can also change the setting from the printer control
panel. Navigate to Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration
> Paper Size/Type.
b Print the document.
Is the paper folded or wrinkled?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Gray background
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to
navigate through the settings.
Troubleshooting 244
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Turn o the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn on the
printer.
b Decrease toner darkness.
From the control panel, navigate to:
Settings > Print > Quality > Toner Darkness
c Print the document.
Does gray background appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Check if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark
toner cartridge.
Note: If the toner cartridge is not supported, then install a
supported one.
b Print the document.
Does gray background appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type
from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Notes:
• Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.
• You can also change the setting from the printer control
panel. Navigate to Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration
> Paper Size/Type.
b Print the document.
Does gray background appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
a Remove, and then insert the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the
photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may
aect the quality of future print jobs.
b Print the document.
Does gray background appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 245
Action Yes No
Step 5
a Update the printer firmware. For more information, see
“Updating firmware” on page 318.
b Print the document.
Does gray background appear on prints?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
a Replace the imaging unit.
b Print the document.
Does gray background appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Incorrect margins
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Adjust the paper guides to the correct position for the paper
loaded.
b Print the document.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a Set the paper size.
From the control panel, navigate to:
Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type
b Print the document.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size
from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Note: Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.
b Print the document.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 246
Light print
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to
navigate through the settings.
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark
toner cartridge.
Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a
supported one.
b Print the document.
Is the print light?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Turn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on
the printer.
b Increase toner darkness.
From the control panel, navigate to:
Settings > Print > Quality > Toner Darkness
c Print the document.
Is the print light?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type
from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Notes:
• Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.
• You can also change the setting on the printer control
panel. Navigate to Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration
> Paper Size/Type.
b Print the document.
Is the print light?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 247
Action Yes No
Step 4
a Depending on your operating system, specify the print
resolution from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
b Set the resolution to 600 dpi.
c Print the document.
Is the print light?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
a Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light can cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the
photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may
aect the quality of future print jobs.
b Firmly shake the imaging unit to redistribute the toner.
c Insert the imaging unit.
d Turn o the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn on the
printer.
e Print the document.
Is the print light?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
a Check the status of the toner cartridge.
From the control panel, navigate to:
Settings > Reports > Device > Device Statistics
b From the Supply Information section of the pages printed,
check the status of the toner cartridge.
Is the toner cartridge near end of life?
Go to step 7. Contact
customer
support.
Step 7
a Replace the toner cartridge.
b Print the document.
Is the print light?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 248
Mottled print and dots
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to
navigate through the settings.
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark
toner cartridge.
Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a
supported one.
b Print the document.
Is the print mottled?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
Check the printer for leaked toner contamination.
Is the printer free of leaked toner?
Go to step 3. Contact
customer
support.
Step 3
Check the status of the imaging unit. From the control panel,
navigate to:
Status/Supplies > Supplies
Is the imaging unit near end of life?
Go to step 4. Contact
customer
support.
Step 4
a Replace the imaging unit.
b Print the document.
Is the print mottled?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 249
Print crooked or skewed
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the home screen, touch Settings >
Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages.
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Pull out the tray.
b Remove the paper, and then load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use it.
c Squeeze and slide the paper guides to the correct position for
the size of the paper you are loading.
d Insert the tray.
e Print the document.
Is the print crooked or skewed?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Check if you are printing on a supported paper.
b Print the document.
Is the print crooked or skewed?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Solid black pages
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to
navigate through the settings.
Troubleshooting 250
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark
toner cartridge.
Note: If the toner cartridge is not supported, then install a
supported one.
b Print the document.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Remove, and then insert the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the
photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may
aect the quality of future print jobs.
b Print the document.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 251
Action Yes No
Step 3
a Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the
photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may
aect the quality of future print jobs.
b Remove any packing material that is stuck on the imaging unit.
Note: Make sure to remove any obstruction between the
charge roller and photoconductor drum.
c Insert the imaging unit.
d Print the document.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Check the imaging unit for signs of damage.
Is the imaging unit free from damage?
Contact
customer
support.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
a Replace the imaging unit.
b Print the document.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 252
Text or images cut o
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to
navigate through the settings.
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark
toner cartridge.
Note: If the toner cartridge is not supported, then install a
supported one.
b Print the document.
Are text or images cut o?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Remove, and then insert the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the
photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may
aect the quality of future print jobs.
b Print the document.
Are text or images cut o?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 253
Action Yes No
Step 3
a Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the
photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may
aect the quality of future print jobs.
b Remove any packing material that is stuck on the imaging unit.
Note: Make sure to remove any obstruction between the
charge roller and photoconductor drum.
c Insert the imaging unit.
d Print the document.
Are text or images cut o?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
a Replace the imaging unit.
b Print the document.
Are text or images cut o?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 254
Toner easily rubs o
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to
navigate through the settings.
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark
toner cartridge.
Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a
supported one.
b Print the document.
Does toner easily rub o?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type
from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Notes:
• Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.
• You can also change the setting on the printer control
panel.
b Print the document.
Does toner easily rub o?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
a Remove, and then insert the fuser.
b Print the document.
Does toner easily rub o?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 255
Horizontal light bands
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to
navigate through the settings.
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark
toner cartridge.
Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a
supported one.
b Print the document.
Do horizontal light bands appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Turn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on
the printer.
b Print the document.
Do horizontal light bands appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Vertical light bands
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to
navigate through the settings.
Troubleshooting 256
Action Yes No
a Check if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark
toner cartridge.
Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a
supported one.
b Print the document.
Do vertical light bands appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Vertical white lines
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to
navigate through the settings.
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark
toner cartridge.
Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a
supported one.
b Print the document.
Do vertical white lines appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
Fix slow printing problems. For more information, see
“Slow
printing” on page 265.
Do vertical white lines appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
a Replace the imaging unit.
b Print the document.
Do vertical white lines appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 257
Vertical dark bands
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to
navigate through the settings.
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark
toner cartridge.
Note: If the toner cartridge is not supported, then install a
supported one.
b Print the document.
Do vertical dark bands appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Remove the toner cartridge, and then remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the
photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may
aect the quality of future print jobs.
b Insert the imaging unit, and then insert the cartridge.
c Print the document.
Do vertical dark bands appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 258
Action Yes No
Step 3
a Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the
photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may
aect the quality of future print jobs.
b Remove any packing material that is stuck on the imaging unit.
Note: Make sure to remove any obstruction between the
charge roller and photoconductor drum.
c Insert the imaging unit.
d Print the document.
Do vertical dark bands appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
a Check if a bright light enters the right side of the printer, and
move the printer if necessary.
b Print the document.
Do vertical dark bands appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 259
Vertical dark lines
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non-touch-screen printer models, press
to
navigate through the settings.
Action Yes No
Step 1
Using a blank sheet of paper, make a two‑sided copy using the
ADF.
Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?
Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
Step 2
Using a damp, soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the following areas:
• ADF glass pad (A) and ADF glass (B)
• ADF glass (A) and ADF glass pad (B) in door E
Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 260
Action Yes No
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type
from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Notes:
• Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.
• You can also change the setting on the printer control
panel. Navigate to Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration
> Paper Size/Type.
b Print the document.
Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
b Print the document.
Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
a Remove, and then insert the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit
to direct light. Extended exposure to light can cause print
quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the
photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing so may
aect the quality of future print jobs.
b Print the document.
Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Vertical dark lines or streaks
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
navigate through the settings.
Troubleshooting 261
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark
toner cartridge.
Note: If the toner cartridge is not supported, then install a
supported one.
b Print the document.
Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Remove, and then reinstall the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light can cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the
photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may
aect the quality of future print jobs.
b Print the document.
Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
a Replace the imaging unit.
b Print the document.
Do vertical dark lines or streaks appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Vertical dark streaks with print missing
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to
navigate through the settings.
Troubleshooting 262
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the
photoconductor drum under the imaging unit. Doing so may
aect the quality of future print jobs.
b Remove any packing material that is stuck on the imaging unit.
Note: Make sure to remove any obstruction between the
charge roller and photoconductor drum.
c Insert the imaging unit.
d Print the document.
Do vertical dark streaks with missing images appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Check if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark
toner cartridge.
Note: If the toner cartridge is not supported, then install a
supported one.
b Print the document.
Do vertical dark streaks with missing images appear on prints?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 263
Repeating defects
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to
navigate through the settings.
Action Yes No
Step 1
Using the Print Quality Test Pages, check if the distance
between the repeating defects is equal to any of the following:
• 96 mm (3.78 in.)
• 49 mm (1.93 in.)
• 47.5 mm (1.87 in.)
• 30.2 mm (1.18 in.)
Does the distance between the repeating defects match any of the
measurements?
Go to step 2. Take note of the
distance, and then
contact
customer
support.
Step 2
a Replace the imaging unit.
b Print the document.
Do the repeating defects appear?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Print jobs do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
a From the document you are trying to print, open the Print
dialog, and then check if you have selected the correct printer.
b Print the document.
Is the document printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 264
Action Yes No
Step 2
a Check if the printer is on.
b Resolve any error messages that appear on the display.
c Print the document.
Is the document printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
a Check if the ports are working and if the cables are securely
connected to the computer and the printer.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came
with the printer.
b Print the document.
Is the document printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
a Turn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on
the printer.
b Print the document.
Is the document printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
a Remove, and then reinstall the print driver.
b Print the document.
Is the document printed?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Slow printing
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure that the printer cable is securely connected to the
printer and to the computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
Is the printer printing slow?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Make sure that the printer is not in Quiet Mode.
From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Maintenance
> Configuration Menu > Device Operations > Quiet Mode.
b Print the document.
Is the printer printing slow?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 265
Action Yes No
Step 3
a Depending on your operating system, specify the print
resolution from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
b Set the resolution to 600 dpi.
c Print the document.
Is the printer printing slow?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
a From the home screen, touch Settings > Print > Quality > Print
Resolution.
b Set the resolution to 600 dpi.
c Print the document.
Is the printer printing slow?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type
from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Notes:
• Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.
• You can also change the setting on the printer control
panel.
• Heavier paper prints more slowly.
• Paper narrower than letter, A4, and legal may print more
slowly.
b Print the document.
Is the printer printing slow?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
a Make sure that the printer settings for texture and weight match
the paper being loaded.
From the home screen, touch Settings > Paper > Media
Configuration > Media Types.
Note: Rough paper textures and heavy paper weights may
print more slowly.
b Print the document.
Is the printer printing slow?
Go to step 7. The problem is
solved.
Step 7
Remove held jobs.
Is the printer printing slow?
Go to step 8. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 266
Action Yes No
Step 8
a Make sure that the printer is not overheating.
Notes:
• Allow the printer to cool down after a long print job.
• Observe the recommended ambient temperature for the
printer. For more information, see
“Selecting a location
for the printer” on page 12.
b Print the document.
Is the printer printing slow?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Adjusting toner darkness
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Print > Quality.
2 In the Toner Darkness menu, adjust the settings.
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if you are printing on the correct paper.
b Print the document.
Is the document printed on the correct paper?
Go to step 2. Load the correct
paper size and paper
type.
Step 2
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size
and paper type from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Note: You can also change the settings on the printer control
panel. Navigate to:
Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type
b Make sure that the settings match the paper loaded.
c Print the document.
Is the document printed on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
a Check if the trays are linked.
For more information, see
“Linking trays” on page 38.
b Print the document.
Is the document printed from the correct tray?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 267
Confidential and other held documents do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
a From the control panel, check if the documents appear in the
Held Jobs list.
Note: If the documents are not listed, then print the
documents using the Print and Hold options.
b Print the documents.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
• Delete the print job, and then send it again.
• For PDF files, generate a new file, and then print the
documents.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading
the multiple job titles as duplicates.
For Windows users
a Open the Printing Preferences dialog.
b From the Print and Hold tab, click Use Print and Hold, and then
click Keep duplicate documents.
c Enter a PIN, and then save the changes.
d Send the print job.
For Macintosh users
a Save and name each job dierently.
b Send the job individually.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
a Delete some held jobs to free up printer memory.
b Print the documents.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
a Add printer memory.
b Print the documents.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 268
The printer is not responding
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the power cord is connected to the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or
electrical shock, connect the power cord to an appropriately
rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.
Is the printer responding?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the electrical outlet is turned o by a switch or breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned o by a switch or breaker?
Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if the printer is on.
Is the printer on?
Go to step 4. Turn on the printer.
Step 4
Check if the printer is in Sleep or Hibernate mode.
Is the printer in Sleep or Hibernate mode?
Press the power
button to wake the
printer.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are
inserted to the correct ports.
Are the cables inserted to the correct ports?
Go to step 6. Insert the cables to
the correct ports.
Step 6
Turn o the printer, install the hardware options, and then turn on
the printer.
For more information, see the documentation that came with the
option.
Is the printer responding?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 7.
Step 7
Install the correct print driver.
Is the printer responding?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 8.
Step 8
Turn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
printer.
Is the printer responding?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 269
Unable to read flash drive
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the printer is not busy processing another print, copy,
scan, or fax job.
Is the printer ready?
Go to step 2. Wait for the printer to
finish processing the
other job.
Step 2
Check if the flash drive is supported. For more information, see
“Supported flash drives and file types” on page 48.
Is the
flash
drive supported?
Go to step 3. Insert a supported
flash drive.
Step 3
a Check if the USB port is enabled. For more information, see
“Enabling the USB port” on page 270.
b Remove, and then insert the flash drive.
Does the printer recognize the flash drive?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Enabling the USB port
From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > USB > Enable USB Port.
Network connection problems
Cannot open Embedded Web Server
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the printer is on.
Is the printer on?
Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2
Make sure that the printer IP address is correct.
Notes:
• View the IP address on the home screen.
• An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by
periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Is the printer IP address correct?
Go to step 3. Type the correct
printer IP address in
the address
field.
Troubleshooting 270
Action Yes No
Step 3
Check if you are using a supported browser:
• Internet Explorer version 11 or later
• Microsoft Edge
• Safari version 6 or later
• Google Chrome
TM
version 32 or later
• Mozilla Firefox version 24 or later
Is your browser supported?
Go to step 4. Install a supported
browser.
Step 4
Check if the network connection is working.
Is the network connection working?
Go to step 5. Contact your
administrator.
Step 5
Make sure that the cable connections to the printer and print server
are secure. For more information, see the documentation that
came with the printer.
Are the cable connections secure?
Go to step 6. Secure the cable
connections.
Step 6
Check if the web proxy servers are disabled.
Are the web proxy servers disabled?
Go to step 7. Contact your
administrator.
Step 7
Access the Embedded Web Server.
Did the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Cannot connect the printer to the Wi‑Fi network
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure that Active Adapter is set to Auto.
From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Network
Overview > Active Adapter > Auto.
Can the printer connect to the Wi‑Fi network?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the correct Wi‑Fi network is selected.
Note: Some routers may share the default SSID.
Are you connecting to the correct Wi‑Fi network?
Go to step 4. Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting 271
Action Yes No
Step 3
Connect to the correct Wi‑Fi network. For more information, see
“Connecting the printer to a Wi‑Fi network” on page 167.
Can the printer connect to the Wi‑Fi network?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
Check the wireless security mode.
From the home screen, touch Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless
> Wireless Security Mode.
Is the correct wireless security mode selected?
Go to step 6. Go to step 5.
Step 5
Select the correct wireless security mode.
Can the printer connect to the Wi‑Fi network?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
Make sure that you entered the correct network password.
Note: Take note of the spaces, numbers, and capitalization in the
password.
Can the printer connect to the Wi‑Fi network?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Checking the printer connectivity
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Reports > Network > Network Setup Page.
2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is connected.
If the status is not connected, then the LAN drop may be inactive, or the network cable may be unplugged
or malfunctioning. Contact your administrator for assistance.
Troubleshooting 272
Hardware options problems
Cannot detect internal option
Action Yes No
Step 1
Turn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
printer.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Print the Menu Settings Page, and then check if the internal option
appears in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if the internal option is installed properly into the controller
board.
a Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the
electrical outlet.
b Make sure that the internal option is installed in the appropriate
connector in the controller board.
c Connect the power cord to the electrical outlet, and then turn
on the printer.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire
or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet
that is near the product and easily accessible.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
a Check if the internal option is available in the print driver.
Note: If necessary, manually add the internal option in the
print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more
information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver”
on page 317.
b Resend the print job.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Defective flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the defective flash memory.
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing.
Troubleshooting 273
• Cancel the current print job.
Not enough free space in flash memory for resources
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.
• Install flash memory with larger capacity.
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros that are not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.
Unformatted flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
• From the control panel, select Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing.
• Format the flash memory.
Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and needs to be
replaced.
Issues with supplies
Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch
To correct this problem, purchase a cartridge with the correct region that matches the printer region, or
purchase a worldwide cartridge.
• The first number in the message after 42 indicates the region of the printer.
• The second number in the message after 42 indicates the region of the cartridge.
Printer and toner cartridge regions
Region Numeric code
Worldwide or Undefined region 0
North America (United States, Canada) 1
European Economic Area, Western Europe, Nordic countries, Switzerland 2
Asia Pacific 3
Latin America 4
Rest of Europe, Middle East, Africa 5
Australia, New Zealand 6
Invalid region 9
Note: To
find
the region settings of the printer and toner cartridge, print the print quality test pages.
From the control panel, navigate to: Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages.
Troubleshooting 274
Non‑Lexmark supply
The printer has detected a non‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-
party supplies or parts may aect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging
components.
All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts and may deliver unpredictable
results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may
damage your Lexmark printer or associated components.
Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can
aect
warranty coverage.
Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.
To accept any and all of these risks and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your
printer, from the control panel, press and hold X and # simultaneously for 15 seconds.
If you do not want to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer and
install a genuine Lexmark supply or part. For more information, see
“Using genuine Lexmark parts and
supplies” on page 186.
If the printer does not print after pressing and holding X and # simultaneously for 15 seconds, then reset
the supply usage counter.
1 From the control panel, navigate to:
Settings > Device > Maintenance > Configuration Menu > Supply Usage And Counters
2 Select the part or supply that you want to reset, and then select Start.
3 Read the warning message, and then select Continue.
4 Press and hold X and # simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message.
Note: If you are unable to reset the supply usage counters, then return the item to the place of
purchase.
Paper feed problems
Envelope seals when printing
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Use an envelope that has been stored in a dry environment.
Note: Printing on envelopes with high moisture content can
seal the flaps.
b Send the print job.
Does the envelope seal when printing?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 275
Action Yes No
Step 2
a Make sure that paper type is set to Envelope.
From the control panel, navigate to:
Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type
b Send the print job.
Does the envelope seal when printing?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Collated printing does not work
Action Yes No
Step 1
a From the control panel, navigate to:
Settings > Print > Layout > Collate
b Tou c h On [1,2,1,2,1,2].
c Print the document.
Is the document collated correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a From the document that you are trying to print, open the Print
dialog, and then select Collate.
b Print the document.
Is the document collated correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
a Reduce the number of pages to print.
b Print the document.
Are the pages collated correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Paper curl
Note: Before solving the problem, print the Print Quality Test Pages. From the control panel, navigate to
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to
navigate through the settings.
Troubleshooting 276
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if the paper loaded is supported.
Note: If paper is not supported, then load a supported paper.
b Print the document.
Is the paper curled?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
a Check if the printer is using a genuine and supported Lexmark
toner cartridge.
Note: If the cartridge is not supported, then install a
supported one.
b Print the document.
Is the paper curled?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
a Adjust the guides in the tray to the correct position for the paper
loaded.
b Print the document.
Is the paper curled?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
a Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size
and paper type from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Notes:
• Make sure that the settings match the paper loaded.
• You can also change the setting on the printer control
panel. Navigate to Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration
> Paper Size/Type.
b Print the document.
Is the paper curled?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
a Remove paper, flip it over, and then reload paper.
b Print the document.
Is the paper curled?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use it.
b Print the document.
Is the paper curled?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 277
Tray linking does not work
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if the trays contain the same paper size and paper type.
b Check if the paper guides are positioned correctly.
c Print the document.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a From the control panel, touch Settings > Paper > Tray
Configuration > Paper Size/Type
b Set the paper size and paper type to match the paper loaded
in the linked trays.
c Print the document.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
a Make sure that Tray Linking is set to Automatic. For more
information, see
“Linking trays” on page 38.
b Print the document.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Paper frequently jams
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Remove the tray.
b Check if paper is loaded correctly.
Notes:
• Make sure that the paper guides are positioned correctly.
• Make sure that the stack height is below the maximum
paper fill indicator.
• Make sure to print on recommended paper size and type.
c Insert the tray.
d Print the document.
Do paper jams occur frequently?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 278
Action Yes No
Step 2
a From the control panel, navigate to:
Settings > Paper > Tray Configuration > Paper Size/Type
b Set the correct paper size and type.
c Print the document.
Do paper jams occur frequently?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
a Load paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use it.
b Print the document.
Do paper jams occur frequently?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Jammed pages are not reprinted
Action Yes No
a From the control panel, navigate to:
Settings > Device >
Notifications
> Jam Content Recovery
b In the Jam Recovery menu, select On or Auto.
c Print the document.
Are the jammed pages reprinted?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 279
E-mailing problems
Cannot send e
‑mails
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure that the e‑mail SMTP settings are configured correctly.
For more information, see
“Configuring the e‑mail SMTP settings”
on page 55.
Can you send an e‑mail?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Make sure that you are using the correct password. Depending on
your e‑mail service provider, use your account password, app
password, or authentication password. For more information, see
“Configuring
the e‑mail SMTP settings” on page 55.
Can you send an e‑mail?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Make sure that the printer is connected to a network and that the
network is connected to the Internet.
Can you send an e‑mail?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Faxing problems
Caller ID is not shown
Note: These instructions apply only to printers that support analog fax. For more information, see
“Setting up
the printer to fax” on page 64.
Action Yes No
Enable caller ID.
From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax
Receive Settings > Admin Controls > Enable Caller ID.
Does the caller ID appear?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 280
Cannot send or receive faxes using analog fax
Action Yes No
Step 1
Resolve any error messages that appear on the display.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Make sure that the cable connections for the following equipment
are secure:
• Telephone
• Handset
• Answering machine
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check for a dial tone.
• Call the fax number to check if it is working properly.
• If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the
volume to check if you hear a dial tone.
Can you hear a dial tone?
Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
Step 4
Check the telephone wall jack.
a Connect the analog telephone directly to the wall jack.
b Listen for a dial tone.
c If you do not hear a dial tone, then use a
dierent
telephone
cable.
d If you still do not hear a dial tone, then connect the analog
telephone to a
dierent
wall jack.
e If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Troubleshooting 281
Action Yes No
Step 5
Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or to
the correct digital connector.
• If you are using an Integrated Services for Digital Network
(ISDN) telephone service, then connect to an analog telephone
port of an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information, contact
your ISDN provider.
• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that
supports analog use. For more information, contact your DSL
provider.
• If you are using a private branch exchange (PBX) telephone
service, then make sure that you are connecting to an analog
connection on the PBX. If none exists, then consider installing
an analog telephone line for the fax machine.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
Temporarily disconnect other equipment and disable other
telephone services.
a Disconnect other equipment (such as answering machines,
computers, modems, or telephone line splitters) between the
printer and the telephone line.
b Disable call waiting and voice mail. For more information,
contact your telephone company.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 7.
Step 7
Scan the original document one page at a time.
a Dial the fax number.
b Scan the document.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 282
Can receive but not send faxes using analog fax
Action Yes No
Step 1
Load an original document properly into the ADF tray or on the
scanner glass.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Set up the shortcut number properly.
• Check if the shortcut number is set for the telephone number
that you want to dial.
• Dial the telephone number manually.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Can send but not receive faxes using analog fax
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure that the paper source is not empty.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the ring count delay settings.
From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax
Receive Settings > Rings to Answer.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
If the printer is printing blank pages, then see
“Blank or white
pages” on page 239.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Cannot set up etherFAX
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the printer connectivity.
a Print the Network Setup Page. From the home screen, touch
Settings > Reports > Network > Network Setup Page.
b Check the network status.
Is the printer connected to the network?
Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 283
Action Yes No
Step 2
Make sure that the printer is connected to a network and that the
network is connected to the Internet.
Can you set up etherFAX?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Make sure that etherFAX is set up correctly. For more information,
see
“Setting up the fax function using etherFAX” on page 66.
Can you set up etherFAX?
The problem is
solved.
Go to
https://www.etherfa
x.net/lexmark.
Cannot send or receive faxes using etherFAX
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure that the printer is connected to a network and that the
network is connected to the Internet.
Can you send or receive faxes using etherFAX?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a From the home screen, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup >
General Fax Settings.
b Make sure that you have the correct fax number.
c Make sure that Fax Transport is set to etherFAX.
Can you send or receive faxes using etherFAX?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Split large documents into smaller file sizes.
Can you send or receive faxes using etherFAX?
The problem is
solved.
Go to
https://www.etherfa
x.net/lexmark.
Poor fax print quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure that there are no print quality defects.
a From the control panel, touch Settings > Troubleshooting >
Print Quality Test Pages.
b Correct any print quality defects. For more information, see
“Print quality is poor” on page 239.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 284
Action Yes No
Step 2
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.
a From the control panel, touch Settings > Fax > Fax Setup > Fax
Receive Settings > Admin Controls.
b In the Max Speed menu, select a lower transmission speed.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Missing information on the fax cover page
Action No Yes
a Turn
o
the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on
the printer.
b Send or retrieve the fax.
Is there missing information on the fax cover page?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Cannot send the fax cover page from the computer
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Make sure that the print driver is updated. For more information,
see
“Installing the printer software” on page 316.
b Send the fax.
Can you send the fax cover page?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a From the document that you are trying to fax, open the Print
dialog.
b Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences,
Options, or Setup.
c Click Fax, and then clear the Always display settings prior to
faxing setting.
d Send the fax.
Can you send the fax cover page?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 285
Scanning problems
Cannot scan to a computer
Action Yes No
Step 1
Perform a copy job.
Is the copy job successful?
Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
Step 2
a Turn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it
back on.
b Scan the document.
Can you scan the document to a computer?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check the printer connectivity.
a Print the Network Setup Page. From the control panel, navigate
to:
Settings > Reports > Network > Network Setup Page
b Check the network status.
Is the printer connected to the network?
Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
Step 4
a Connect the printer to the network.
b Scan the document.
Can you scan the document to a computer?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
a Make sure that the printer and the computer are connected to
the same network.
b Scan the document.
Can you scan the document to a computer?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Troubleshooting 286
Cannot scan to a network folder
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Create a network folder shortcut.
b Scan a document using the shortcut. For more information, see
“Scanning to a network folder” on page 78.
Can you scan a document and save it to a network folder?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Make sure that the network folder path and format are correct. For
example, //server_hostname/foldername/path, where
server_hostname is a fully qualified domain (FQDN) or IP
address.
Is the network folder path and format correct?
Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Step 3
Make sure that you have a write access permission to the network
folder.
Can you scan a document and save it to a network folder?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Troubleshooting 287
Action Yes No
Step 4
Update the network folder shortcut.
a Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in
the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP
address appears as four sets of numbers separated by
periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it
to load the web page correctly.
b Click Shortcuts, and then select a shortcut.
Note: If you have multiple shortcut types, then select
Network Folder.
c In the Share Path field, type the network folder path.
Notes:
• If your share path is \\server_hostname
\foldername\path, then
type //server_hostname/foldername/path.
• Make sure that you use forward slashes when typing the
share path.
d From the Authentication menu, select your authentication
method.
Note: If Authentication is set to “Use assigned username and
password,” then in the User Name and Password fields, type
your credentials.
e Click Save.
Can you scan a document and save it to a network folder?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Make sure that the printer and the network folder are connected
to the same network.
Can you scan a document and save it to a network folder?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Partial copies of document or photo
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Make sure that the document or photo is loaded facedown on
the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
b Copy the document or photo.
Is the document or photo copied correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 288
Action Yes No
Step 2
a Match the paper size setting and the paper loaded in the tray.
b Copy the document or photo.
Is the document or photo copied correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Poor copy quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass with a damp, soft,
lint‑free cloth. If your printer has a second ADF glass inside the
ADF, then also clean that glass.
For more information, see
“Cleaning the scanner” on page
172.
b Make sure that the document or photo is loaded facedown on
the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
c Copy the document or photo.
Is the copy quality satisfactory?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a Check the quality of the original document or photo.
b Adjust the scan quality settings.
c Copy the document or photo.
Is the copy quality satisfactory?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Vertical dark streaks on output when scanning from the ADF
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Troubleshooting 289
Action Yes No
a Open the scanner cover.
b Using a damp, soft, lint‑free cloth, wipe the ADF glass and the
ADF glass pad.
c Close the scanner cover.
d Scan the document.
Do vertical streaks appear on scanned documents?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Jagged image or text when scanning from the ADF
Action Yes No
a Load 50 sheets of clean, plain paper into the ADF.
Note: The plain paper helps clean or remove dust and other
coating from the ADF feed rollers.
b From the control panel, press
.
c Load an original document into the ADF.
d Scan the document.
Do jagged images or texts appear on the output?
Contact
customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Scan job was not successful
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the cable connections.
a Make sure that the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected
to the computer and the printer.
b Resend the scan job.
Is the scan job successful?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 290
Action Yes No
Step 2
Check the file you want to scan.
a Make sure that the file name is not already used in the
destination folder.
b Make sure that the document or photo you want to scan is not
open in another application.
c Resend the scan job.
Is the scan job successful?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
a Make sure that the Append time stamp or the Overwrite
existing file check box is selected in the destination
configuration settings.
b Resend the scan job.
Is the scan job successful?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Scanner does not close
Action Yes No
Remove obstructions that keep the scanner cover open.
Did the scanner cover close correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
Action Yes No
Close all applications that are interfering with the scan.
Does scanning take too long or freeze the computer?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 291
Scanner does not respond
Action Yes No
Step 1
a Check if the power cord is connected properly to the printer
and the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of
fire
or electrical shock, connect the power cord to an
appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet
that is near the product and easily accessible.
b Copy or scan the document.
Is the scanner responding?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
a Check if the printer is turned on.
b Resolve any error messages that appear on the display.
c Copy or scan the document.
Is the scanner responding?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
a Turn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer on.
b Copy or scan the document.
Is the scanner responding?
The problem is
solved.
Contact
customer
support.
Adjusting scanner registration
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Maintenance > Configuration Menu > Scanner
Configuration > Scanner Manual Registration.
2 In the Print Quick Test menu, touch Start.
3 Place the Print Quick Test page on the scanner glass, and then touch Flatbed Registration.
4 In the Copy Quick Test menu, touch Start.
5 Compare the Copy Quick Test page with the original document.
Note: If the margins of the test page are
dierent
from the original document, then adjust Left Margin and
Top Margin.
6 Repeat step 4 and step 5 until the margins of the Copy Quick Test page closely match the original document.
Adjusting ADF registration
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Maintenance > Configuration Menu > Scanner
Configuration > Scanner Manual Registration.
2 In the Print Quick Test menu, touch Start.
Troubleshooting 292
3 Place the Print Quick Test page on the ADF tray.
4 Tou ch Front ADF Registration or Rear ADF Registration.
Notes:
• To align Front ADF Registration, place the test page faceup, short edge
first
into the ADF.
• To align Rear ADF Registration, place the test page facedown, short edge
first
into the ADF.
5 In the Copy Quick Test menu, touch Start.
6 Compare the Copy Quick Test page with the original document.
Note: If the margins of the test page are
dierent
from the original document, then adjust Horizontal
Adjust and Top Margin.
7 Repeat
step 5 and step 6 until the margins of the Copy Quick Test page closely match the original document.
Contacting customer support
Before contacting customer support, make sure to have the following information:
• Printer problem
• Error message
• Printer model type and serial number
Go to
http://support.lexmark.com to receive e‑mail or chat support, or browse through the library of manuals,
support documentation, drivers, and other downloads.
Technical support via telephone is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries
or regions, go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
Troubleshooting 293
Upgrading and migrating
Hardware
Available internal options
• Memory cards
– DDR3 DIMM
– Flash memory
• Optional cards
– Font cards
– Firmware cards
• Forms and Bar Code
• PRESCRIBE
• IPDS
• Printer hard disk
• Internal solutions port
– Parallel 1284‑B Interface Card
– RS‑232C Serial Interface Card
– Fiber Interface Card
– N8370 802.11a/b/g/n/ac Wireless Print Server Interface Card
Accessing the controller board
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn
the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any
other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the
printer.
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.
3 Using a flat-head screwdriver, open the controller board access cover.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board components or
connectors.
Upgrading and migrating 294
4 Install any supported internal options. For more information, see the documentation that came with the
option.
Upgrading and migrating 295
5 Close the access cover.
6 Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
7 Turn on the printer.
Installing a memory card
Note: These instructions apply only to the DDR3 DIMM memory card.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn
the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any
other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the
printer.
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.
3 Using a flat‑head screwdriver, open the controller board access cover.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board components or
connectors.
Upgrading and migrating 296
4 Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card.
5 Insert the memory card until it clicks into place.
Upgrading and migrating 297
6 Close the access cover.
7 Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
8 Turn on the printer.
Installing an optional card
Note: An optional card is either a font card,
firmware
card, or
flash
memory.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn
the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any
other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the
printer.
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.
3 Using a flat‑head screwdriver, open the controller board access cover.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any components or connectors.
Upgrading and migrating 298
4 Unpack the optional card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card.
5 Push the card firmly into place.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be
flush
against the controller
board.
Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the
controller board.
Upgrading and migrating 299
6 Close the access cover.
7 Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
8 Turn on the printer.
Installing a printer hard disk
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn
the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any
other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the
printer.
1 Turn
o
the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.
3 Using a flat‑head screwdriver, open the controller board access cover.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board components or
connectors.
Upgrading and migrating 300
4 Unpack the hard disk.
5 Attach the hard disk, and then connect the hard disk interface cable to the controller board.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch or press the center of the hard disk.
Upgrading and migrating 301
6 Close the access cover.
7 Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
8 Turn on the printer.
Installing an internal solutions port
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn
the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any
other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the
printer.
1 Turn
o
the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
2 Using a flat‑head screwdriver, open the controller board access cover.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board components or
connectors.
Upgrading and migrating 302
3 Unpack the internal solutions port (ISP) kit.
1 ISP
2 Mounting bracket
3 Thumbscrews
4 If necessary, remove the printer hard disk.
5 Insert the bracket into the board until it clicks into place.
Upgrading and migrating 303
6 Attach the ISP to the bracket.
7 If necessary, attach the hard disk to the ISP.
a Remove the hard disk bracket.
b Connect the hard disk to the ISP.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch or press the center of the hard disk.
Upgrading and migrating 304
Upgrading and migrating 305
8 Close the access cover.
9 Connect the power cord to the electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
Installing the 550
‑sheet tray
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn
the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any
other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the
printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a
caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information
on supported configurations, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.
3 Unpack the optional tray, and then remove all packing material.
Note: If optional trays are already installed, then unlock them from the printer before lifting the printer. Do
not try to lift the printer and trays at the same time.
4 Align the printer with the optional tray, and then lower the printer until it clicks into place.
Upgrading and migrating 306
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: If the printer weight is greater than 20 kg (44 lb), then it may
require two or more people to lift it safely.
5 Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of
fire
or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
6 Turn on the printer.
Add the tray in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding available
options in the print driver” on page 317.
Installing the 2100
‑sheet tray
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn
the printer o, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any
other devices attached to the printer, then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the
printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a
caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information
on supported configurations, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.
3 Unpack the tray, and then remove all packing material.
Note: If optional trays are already installed, then unlock them from the printer before lifting the printer. Do
not try to lift the printer and trays at the same time.
4 Install the tray on the caster base.
Note: Make sure that the caster base wheels are locked.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: If the tray weight is greater than 20 kg (44 lb), then it may require
two or more people to lift it safely.
Upgrading and migrating 307
5 Align the printer with the tray, and then lower the printer until it clicks into place.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: If the printer weight is greater than 20 kg (44 lb), then it may
require two or more people to lift it safely.
Upgrading and migrating 308
6 Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
7 Turn on the printer.
Add the tray in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding available
options in the print driver” on page 317.
Upgrading and migrating 309
Installing the 4‑bin mailbox
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a
caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information
on supported configurations, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.
3 Unpack the mailbox.
4 Remove the printer top cover.
5 Install the mailbox to the printer, and then push it down to make sure that it is securely attached to the printer.
Upgrading and migrating 310
6 Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of
fire
or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
7 Turn on the printer.
Add the mailbox in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding
available options in the print driver” on page 317.
Installing the oset stacker
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a
caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information
on supported configurations, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.
3 Unpack the oset stacker.
4 Remove the printer top cover.
Upgrading and migrating 311
5 Install the oset stacker to the printer, and then push it down to make sure that it is securely attached to the
printer.
6 Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
7 Turn on the printer.
Add the
oset
stacker in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Ad ding
available options in the print driver” on page 317.
Installing the staple finisher
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a
caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information
on supported configurations, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.
3 Unpack the staple
finisher.
Upgrading and migrating 312
4 Remove the printer top cover.
5 Install the staple finisher to the printer, and then push it down to make sure that it is securely attached to
the printer.
6 Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
7 Turn on the printer.
Add the staple finisher in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Ad ding
available options in the print driver” on page 317.
Upgrading and migrating 313
Installing the staple, hole punch finisher
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a
caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information
on supported configurations, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1 Turn o the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.
3 Unpack the staple, hole punch
finisher.
4 Remove the printer top cover.
5 Install the finisher to the printer, and then push it down to make sure that it is securely attached to the printer.
Upgrading and migrating 314
6 Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of
fire
or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
7 Turn on the printer.
Add the finisher in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Add ing
available options in the print driver” on page 317.
Software
Supported operating systems
Using the software CD, you can install the printer software on the following operating systems:
• Windows 10
• Windows 8.1
• Windows Server 2012 R2
• Windows Server 2012
• Windows 7 SP1
• Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1
• Windows Server 2008 SP2
• Windows Vista SP2
• Mac OS X version 10.7 or later
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux WS
• openSUSE Linux
• SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
• Debian GNU/Linux
• Ubuntu
• Fedora
• IBM AIX
• Oracle Solaris SPARC
• Oracle Solaris x86
Notes:
• For Windows operating systems, the print drivers and utilities are supported in both 32‑ and 64‑bit
versions.
• For drivers and utilities that are compatible with Mac OS X version 10.6 or earlier and for specific
supported Linux or UNIX operating system versions, go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
• For more information on software compatibility with all other operating systems, contact customer
support.
Upgrading and migrating 315
Installing the printer software
Notes:
• The print driver is included in the software installer package.
• For Macintosh computers with macOS version 10.7 or later, you do not need to install the driver to print
on an AirPrint-certified printer. If you want custom printing features, then download the print driver.
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the software CD that came with your printer.
• Go to
www.lexmark.com/downloads.
2 Run the installer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Installing the fax driver
1 Go to www.lexmark.com/downloads, search for your printer model, and then download the appropriate
installer package.
2 From your computer, click Printer Properties, and then navigate to the Configuration tab.
3 Select Fax, and then click Apply.
Adding printers to a computer
Before you begin, do one of the following:
• Connect the printer and the computer to the same network. For more information on connecting the printer
to a network, see
“Connecting the printer to a Wi‑Fi network” on page 167.
• Connect the computer to the printer. For more information, see
“Connecting a computer to the printer” on
page 169.
• Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable. For more information, see
“Attaching cables” on
page 16.
Note: The USB cable is sold separately.
For Windows users
1 From a computer, install the print driver.
Note: For more information, see
“Installing the printer software” on page 316.
2 Open Printers & scanners, and then click Add a printer or scanner.
3 Depending on your printer connection, do one of the following:
• Select a printer from the list, and then click Add device.
• Click Show Wi
‑Fi Direct printers, select a printer, and then click Add device.
• Click The printer that I want isn’t listed, and then from the Add Printer window, do the following:
a Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname, and then click Next.
b In the “Hostname or IP address”
field,
type the printer IP address, and then click Next.
Upgrading and migrating 316
Notes:
– View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
– If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
c Select a print driver, and then click Next.
d Select Use the print driver that is currently installed (recommended), and then click Next.
e Type a printer name, and then click Next.
f Select a printer sharing option, and then click Next.
g Click Finish.
For Macintosh users
1 From a computer, open Printers & Scanners.
2 Click
, and then select a printer.
3 From the Use menu, select a print driver.
Notes:
• To use the Macintosh print driver, select either AirPrint or Secure AirPrint.
• If you want custom printing features, then select the Lexmark print driver. To install the driver, see
“Installing the printer software” on page 316.
4 Add the printer.
Adding available options in the print driver
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
2 Select the printer you want to update, and then do either of the following:
• For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
• For earlier versions, select Properties.
3 Navigate to the Configuration tab, and then select Update Now
‑ Ask Printer.
4 Apply the changes.
For Macintosh users
1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer, and then select Options & Supplies.
2 Navigate to the list of hardware options, and then add any installed options.
3 Apply the changes.
Upgrading and migrating 317
Firmware
Exporting or importing a configuration file
You can export the configuration settings of your printer into a text file, and then import the file to apply the
settings to other printers.
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
2 From the Embedded Web Server, click Export Configuration or Import Configuration.
3 Follow the instructions on the screen.
4 If the printer supports applications, then do the following:
a Click Apps > select the application >
Configure
.
b Click Export or Import.
Updating firmware
Some applications require a minimum device firmware level to operate correctly.
For more information on updating the device
firmware,
contact your Lexmark representative.
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Device > Update Firmware.
3 Do either of the following:
• Click Check for updates > I agree, start update.
• Upload the flash file.
Note: To get the latest firmware, go to
www.lexmark.com/downloads, and then search for your
printer model.
a Browse to the flash file.
Note: Make sure that you have extracted the firmware zip file.
b Click Upload > Start.
Upgrading and migrating 318
Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark MX822ade, Lexmark MX822adtfe, Lexmark MX822adxe, Lexmark MX822de; Lexmark MX826ade,
Lexmark MX826adtfe, Lexmark MX826adxe, Lexmark MX826de; Lexmark XM7355, Lexmark XM7355b,
Lexmark XM7355bi, Lexmark XM7355i; Lexmark XM7370, Lexmark XM7370i MFPs
Machine type:
7465
Models:
436, 496, 836, 896
Edition notice
September 2022
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local
law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of
express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made
to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the
products or the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to
make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is
not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally
equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be
used instead. Evaluation and
verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services,
except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on Lexmark's privacy policy governing the use of this product, go to
www.lexmark.com/privacy.
For information on supplies and downloads, go to
www.lexmark.com.
© 2018 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is
defined
in 48
C.F.R. 2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are
used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R.
Notices 319
227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software
Documentation are licensed to the U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only
those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
Trademarks
Lexmark and the Lexmark logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc. in the
United States and/or other countries.
Gmail, Android, Google Play, and Google Chrome are trademarks of Google LLC.
Macintosh, Safari, and AirPrint are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. App
Store and iCloud are service marks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Use of the Works
with Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to work specifically with the technology
identified in the badge and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
The Mopria® word mark is a registered and/or unregistered trademark of Mopria Alliance, Inc. in the United
States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s
designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer
is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used
in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Wi-Fi® and Wi-Fi Direct® are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the CD:\NOTICES directory of the
installation software CD.
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO
9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing One-sided: 54 (MX822, XM7355); 56
(MX826, XM7370)
Two-sided: 53 (MX822, XM7355); 55
(MX826, XM7370)
Scanning 57
Copying 58 (MX822, XM7355); 59 (MX826,
XM7370)
Ready 14
Notices 320
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
The WEEE logo
signifies
specific
recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the
European Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your
local sales oce phone number.
India E-Waste notice
This product including components, consumables, parts and spares complies with the “India E-Waste Rules”
and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated
diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1% by weight and 0.01% by weight for cadmium, except for the
exemption set in the Rule.
Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local
authorities for disposal and recycling options.
EU battery directive
This product may contain a coin‑cell lithium rechargeable battery. This product is in compliance with EU
Directive 2006/66/EC as amended by Directive 2008/12/EC, 2008/103/EC, and 2013/56/EU.
Notices 321
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program allows you to return used cartridges for free to Lexmark for reuse
or recycling. One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or
demanufactured for recycling. The boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled.
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, do the following:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Select the product that you want to recycle.
Static sensitivity notice
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch the areas near these symbols without first touching
a metal surface in an area away from the symbol.
To prevent damage from electrostatic discharge when performing maintenance tasks such as clearing paper
jams or replacing supplies, touch any exposed metal frame of the printer before accessing or touching interior
areas of the printer even if the symbol is not present.
ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR
®
emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to
comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as of the date of manufacture.
Temperature information
Operating temperature and relative humidity 10 to 32.2°C (50 to 90°F) and 15 to 80% RH
15.3 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F) and 8 to 15% RH
Maximum wet bulb temperature: 22.8°C (73°F)
Printer / cartridge / imaging unit long-
term storage
1
Printer / cartridge / imaging unit short-term
shipping
-40 to 43.3°C (-40 to 110°F)
1
Supplies shelf life is approximately 2 years. This is based on storage in a standard oce environment at 22°C (72°F)
and 45% humidity.
2
Wet-bulb temperature is determined by the air temperature and the relative humidity.
Notices 322
Laser notice
The printer is
certified
in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for
Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements
of IEC 60825-1: 2014.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there
is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance,
or prescribed service conditions. The printer has a non-serviceable printhead assembly that contains a laser
with the following specifications:
Class: IIIb (3b) AlGaAs
Nominal output power (milliwatts): 25
Wavelength (nanometers): 755–800
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode Description Power consumption (Watts)
Printing The product is generating hard‑copy output from
electronic inputs.
One-sided: 690 (MX822, XM7355); 850
(MX826, XM7370)
Two-sided: 490 (MX822, XM7355); 640
(MX826, XM7370)
Copy The product is generating hard‑copy output from
hard‑copy original documents.
750 (MX822, XM7355); 900 (MX826, XM7370)
Scan The product is scanning hard‑copy documents. 84 (MX822, XM7355); 86 (MX826, XM7370)
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. Higher power usage: 58 (MX822, XM7355); 50
(MX826, XM7370)
Lower power usage: 36.5 (MX822, XM7355);
35 (MX826, XM7370)
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode. 1.78 (MX822, XM7355); 2.94 (MX826, XM7370)
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode. 0.2
O The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but
the power switch is turned o.
0.2
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements.
Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See
www.lexmark.com for current values.
Notices 323
Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by
lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged
after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 15
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 120 minutes.
If the print speed is less than or equal to 30 pages per minute, then you can set the timeout only up to 60
minutes. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the
response time of the product. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but
uses more energy.
Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in
Hibernate Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
• Using the Hibernate Timeout
• Using the Schedule Power modes
Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions 3 days
The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be
modified
between one hour and one month.
Notes on EPEAT-registered imaging equipment products:
• Standby power level occurs in Hibernate or O mode.
• The product shall automatically power down to a standby power level of ≤ 1 W. The auto standby function
(Hibernate or O) shall be enabled at product shipment.
O
mode
If this product has an o mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product
power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to estimate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are
provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends
in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's
energy usage.
Applicability of Regulation (EU) 2019/2015 and (EU) 2019/2020
Per Commission Regulation (EU) 2019/2015 and (EU) 2019/2020, the light source contained within this product
or its component is intended to be used for Image Capture or Image Projection only, and is not intended for
use in other applications.
Notices 324
Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain the analog facsimile card:
Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model Number:
LEX-M14-002 or LEX-M03-002
Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative
Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other
information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided
to your telephone company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply
with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. Use a compliant telephone cord
(RJ-11) that is 26 AWG or larger when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network. See
your setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to
a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an
incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number
of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone
company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier
that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point
(for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company
will notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the
FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could
aect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in
order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. at
www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark
International, Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state taris. Contact the state public utility commission, public
service commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of
this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm
equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other
electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a
margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time
it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the
Notices 325
telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number
provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance
transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical
specifications.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) indicates the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to
a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only
to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five. The REN is located on the product
label.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux
spécifications
techniques d’Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique
Canada.
Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number : numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) indique le nombre maximum
d'appareils pouvant être connectés à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui
peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas
dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN est indiqué sur l'étiquette produit.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item
of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions
for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any
sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another
item of telepermitted equipment of a dierent make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible
with all of Telecom's network services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom “111” Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the eective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same
line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for
which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should diculties arise in such circumstances.
The decadic (or pulse) dialing on this device is unsuitable for use on the Telecom network in New Zealand.
For correct operation, the total of all the Ringer Equivalence Numbers (RENs) of all parallel devices connected
to the same telephone line may not exceed 5. The REN of this device is located on the label.
Notices 326
This device uses an RJ-11C modular connector. Contact your point of purchase if a BT adapter is required. The
Lexmark part number is 80D1873.
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the
equipment associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following
limits for compliance to Telecom's specifications:
• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single
manual call initiation, and
• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt
and the beginning of the next call attempt.
• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to dierent numbers are spaced such that there
is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.
Japanese telecom notice
The installed optional modem is in compliance with Japanese Telecommunication Law and has been Certified
by JATE, with the following Certification Number:
A18-0046001 or A11-0160001
Lexmark International, Inc.
LEX-M14-002 or LEX-M03-002
A18-0046001 or A11-0160001
Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which
receives metering pulses in Switzerland.
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark :
80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse.
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark
Teilenummer 80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen
werden.
Notices 327
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un
filtro
toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee
che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera.
Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains regulatory information that applies only to wireless models.
If in doubt as to whether your model is a wireless model, go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
Modular component notice
Wireless‑equipped models contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model Number: LEX-M07-001; FCC ID: IYLLEXM07001; Industry Canada IC: 2376A-
M07001
Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other
regulatory agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and
any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
This device complies with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique Canada
Cet appareil est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence d'Innovation, Sciences et Développement
économique Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit
pas causer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toutes les interférences, y compris les celles qui peuvent
entraîner un fonctionnement indésirable.
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directive 2014/53/EU on the
approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to radio equipment.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,
40550 USA. The EEA/EU authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8
Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. The EEA/EU Importer is: Lexmark
International Technology S.à.r.l. 20, Route de Pré-Bois, ICC Building, Bloc A, CH-1215 Genève, Switzerland. A
declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized
Notices 328
Representative or may be obtained at
www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/european-union-declaration-of-conformity.html.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking:
Restrictions
This radio equipment is restricted to indoor use only. Outdoor use is prohibited. This restriction applies to all
the countries listed in the table below:
AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE
EL ES FI FR HR HU IE IS IT
LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT
RO SE SI SK TR UK (NI)
EU and other countries statement of radio transmitter operational frequency bands and
maximum RF power
This radio product transmits in either the 2.4GHz (2.412–2.472 GHz in the EU) or 5GHz (5.15–5.35, 5.47–5.725
in the EU) bands. The maximum transmitter EIRP power output, including antenna gain, is ≤ 20dBm for both
bands.
United Kingdom (UK) conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the Radio Equipment Regulations 2017.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,
40550 USA. The UK Importer is: Lexmark International Ltd,
Highfield
House, Foundation Park - 8 Roxborough
Way, Maidenhead Berkshire - SL6 3UD, United Kingdom. A declaration of conformity is available upon request
from the UK Importer or may be obtained at
www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/uk-declaration-of-conformity.html.
Compliance is indicated by the UKCA marking:
Notices 329
Restrictions or requirements in the UK
This radio equipment is restricted to indoor use only. Outdoor use is prohibited.
UK statement of radio transmitter operational frequency bands and maximum RF power
This radio product transmits in either the 2.4GHz (2.412–2.472 GHz in the UK) or 5GHz (5.15–5.35, 5.47–5.725
in the UK) bands. The maximum transmitter EIRP power output, including antenna gain, is ≤ 20dBm for both
bands.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information
statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than
recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes
or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing
device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach
or 1021294 for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a
violation of FCC regulations.
Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:
Director of Lexmark Technology & Services
Lexmark International, Inc.
740 West New Circle Road
Lexington, KY 40550
Telephone: (859) 232–2000
E-mail: [email protected]
Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada compliance
statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
Standard ICES-003.
Notices 330
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’Innovation, Sciences et
Développement économique Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux
équipements pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
Japanese VCCI notice
Notice to users of Class A products in Brazil
Este produto não é apropriado para uso em ambientes domésticos, pois poderá causar interferências
eletromagnéticas que obrigam o usuário a tomar medidas necessárias para minimizar estas interferências.
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2014/30/EU, 2014/35/EU,
and 2011/65/EU as amended by (EU) 2015/863 on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within
certain voltage limits, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic
equipment.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,
40550 USA. The EEA/EU authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8
Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. The EEA/EU Importer is: Lexmark
International Technology S.à.r.l. 20, Route de Pré-Bois, ICC Building, Bloc A, CH-1215 Genève, Switzerland. A
declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized
Representative or may be obtained at
www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/european-union-declaration-of-conformity.html.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55032 and safety requirements of EN 62368-1.
United Kingdom (UK) conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations
2016, the Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016, and the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous
Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment Regulations 2012.
Notices 331
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,
40550 USA. The UK Importer is: Lexmark International Ltd, Highfield House, Foundation Park - 8 Roxborough
Way, Maidenhead Berkshire - SL6 3UD, United Kingdom. A declaration of conformity is available upon request
from the UK Importer or may be obtained at
www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/uk-declaration-of-conformity.html.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of BS EN 55032 and safety requirements of BS EN 62368-1.
Radio interference notice
Warning
This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN 55032 Class A limits and immunity
requirements of EN 55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case
the user may be required to take adequate measures.
STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER
PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the
country-specific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale,
from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for
repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the
product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or
option with the product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to
that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this
statement to that user.
Notices 332
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12
months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with
the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser
Units, Transfer/Transport Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is
available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance”
message for such item.
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to
deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark
designated location. You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the
Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of
the Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a
repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal
obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the
latest version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized
products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized
use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable
storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area
contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer
covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of
prints produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
Notices 333
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS
OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND
SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW
ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL
APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES, AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT
TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance
or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover
actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the
product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or
damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL
LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER
ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the
possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's
and its Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers
are intended
beneficiaries
of this limitation.
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not
apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
Notices 334
Index
Numerics
2100‑sheet tray
installing 307
loading 32
4‑bin mailbox
installing 310
A
accessing the controller
board 294
activating Voice Guidance 27
adapter plug 70
adding a shortcut
copy 54
adding contacts 25
adding groups 25
adding hardware options
print driver 317
adding internal options
print driver 317
adding printers to a
computer 316
adding shortcut
e‑mail 63
fax destination 73
FTP address 78
ADF feed roller
cleaning 181
replacing 203
ADF pick roller
cleaning 179
replacing 200
ADF registration
adjusting 292
ADF separator roller
replacing 206
ADF torque limiter
replacing 209
adjusting
scanner registration 292
adjusting ADF registration 292
adjusting default volume
headphone 167
adjusting fax darkness 74
adjusting speech rate
Voice Guidance 27
adjusting the brightness
printer display 217
adjusting the brightness of the
printer display 217
adjusting toner darkness 267
AirPrint
using 46
analog fax
setting up 65
answering machine
setting up 68
applications, supported 20
assigning printer to a ring
pattern 72
attaching cables 16
automatic document feeder
(ADF)
using 52, 55, 64, 76
avoiding paper jams 218
B
blank pages 239
blocking junk faxes 74
bookmarks
creating 24
creating folders for 25
C
canceling a print job
from the computer 51
from the printer control
panel 51
cannot connect printer to
Wi‑Fi 271
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 270
cannot receive faxes using
analog fax 283
cannot scan to a network
folder 287
cannot send e‑mails 280
cannot send or receive faxes
using analog fax 281
cannot send or receive faxes
using etherFAX 284
cannot send the fax cover page
from the computer 285
Card Copy
setting up 20
changing resolution
fax 73
changing the printer port settings
after installing ISP 170
changing the wallpaper 21
checking the printer
connectivity 272
checking the status of parts and
supplies 186
cleaning
exterior of the printer 171
interior of the printer 171
pick tires 175
cleaning pick roller in the
multipurpose feeder 176
cleaning the ADF feed roller 181
cleaning the ADF pick roller 179
cleaning the printer 171
Cleaning the Scanner 162
cleaning the scanner 172
cleaning the touch screen 172
clearing jam
automatic document
feeder 226
in door A 221
in door H 229
in door N 228
in mailbox bin 228
in the duplex unit 223
in the fuser 223
in the multipurpose feeder 225
in the
oset
stacker bin 229
in the staple finisher 232
in the staple finisher bin 229
in the staple, hole punch
finisher 231
in the staple, hole punch
finisher
bin 231
in trays 220
clearing staple jam
in the staple, hole punch
finisher
235
Cloud Connector
profile
creating 23
printing from 50
scanning to 79
collated printing does not
work 276
Index 335
collating copies 53
computer
connecting to the printer 169
computer, scanning to 76
confidential documents do not
print 268
confidential print jobs 49
printing 49
configuring daylight saving
time 72
configuring fax speaker
settings 167
configuring supply
notifications 166
configuring the e‑mail server
settings 55
configuring Wi‑Fi Direct 169
connecting a computer to the
printer 169
connecting mobile device
to printer 169
connecting printer to distinctive
ring service 72
connecting the printer
to a wireless network 167
connecting to a wireless network
using PIN method 168
using Push Button method 168
conserving supplies 217
contacting customer
support 293
contacts
adding 25
deleting 26
editing 26
control panel
using 17
controller board
accessing 294
copy troubleshooting
partial copies of documents or
photos 288
poor copy quality 289
scanner does not respond 292
copying
on both sides of the paper 53
on letterhead 53
photos 52
using the automatic document
feeder (ADF) 52
using the scanner glass 52
copying dierent paper sizes 52
copying from
selected tray 52
copying multiple pages
onto a single sheet 54
creating a Cloud Connector
profile 23
creating a shortcut
copy 54
creating bookmarks 24
creating folders
for bookmarks 25
creating shortcut
e‑mail 63
fax destination 73
FTP address 78
creating shortcuts 21
crooked print 250
Customer Support
using 23
customer support
contacting 293
customizing the display 21
D
dark print 241
date and time
fax settings 72
daylight saving time
configuring
72
deactivating the Wi‑Fi
network 170
default headphone volume
adjusting 167
Defective flash detected 273
deleting contacts 26
deleting groups 26
Device Quotas
setting up 22
dierent paper sizes, copying 52
directory list
printing 51
Display Customization
using 21
distinctive ring service, fax
enabling 72
documents, printing
from a computer 46
from a mobile device 46
E
Eco‑Settings
configuring 23
editing contacts 26
editing groups 26
emission notices 320, 328, 331
emptying the hole punch
box 184
enabling Magnification mode 27
enabling personal identification
numbers 28
enabling spoken passwords 28
enabling the USB port 270
enabling Wi‑Fi Direct 169
encrypting
printer hard disk 164
enlarging copies 53
envelopes
loading 37
environmental settings 216
erasing
printer memory 163
erasing hard disk memory 163
erasing printer memory 164
etherFAX, using
setting up fax function 66
Ethernet cable 16
Ethernet port 16
exporting a configuration file
using the Embedded Web
Server 318
EXT port 16
e‑mail
sending 63
e‑mail alerts
setting up 166
e‑mail function
setting up 55
e‑mail server
configuring 55
e‑mail service providers 55
e‑mail shortcut
creating 63
e‑mail troubleshooting
cannot send e‑mails 280
e‑mailing
using the automatic document
feeder (ADF) 55
using the scanner glass 55
Index 336
F
factory default settings
restoring 164
fax
forwarding 74
holding 74
scheduling send time and
date 73
sending 72
fax darkness
adjusting 74
fax destination shortcut
creating 73
fax driver
installing 316
fax log
viewing 74
fax resolution
changing 73
fax server, using
setting up the fax function 67
fax setup
country‑ or region‑specific 70
standard telephone line
connection 68
fax speaker settings
configuring 167
fax troubleshooting
caller ID is not shown 280
can send but not receive faxes
using analog fax 283
cannot send faxes using analog
fax 283
cannot send or receive faxes
using analog fax 281
cannot send or receive faxes
using etherFAX 284
cannot send the fax cover page
from the computer 285
cannot set up etherFAX 283
missing information on the fax
cover page 285
poor print quality 284
faxing
setting the date and time 72
using the automatic document
feeder (ADF) 64
using the scanner glass 64
FCC notices 328
finding information about the
printer 10
finding the printer serial
number 11
firmware, updating 318
flash drive
printing from 47
scanning to 78
folder paper 243
font sample list
printing 51
forwarding fax 74
FTP address
creating shortcut 78
FTP server, scanning to
using the control panel 77
fuser
replacing 193
G
genuine Lexmark parts and
supplies 186
gray background on prints 244
groups
adding 25
deleting 26
editing 26
H
hard disk memory
erasing 163
hardware options
installing 307, 310, 311, 312, 314
memory card 296
trays 306
hardware options, adding
print driver 317
held documents do not print 268
held jobs 49
printing 49
Help menu 161
Hibernate mode
configuring 216
holding faxes 74
hole punch box
emptying 184
home screen
customizing 20
home screen icons
displaying 20
using 19
humidity around the printer 322
I
icons on the home screen
showing 20
identifying jam locations 219
imaging unit
ordering 188
replacing 191
importing a configuration file
using the Embedded Web
Server 318
incorrect margins 246
indicator light
understanding the status 17
installing a memory card 296
installing internal solutions
port 302
installing optional card 298
installing options
printer hard disk 300
installing the 2100‑sheet
tray 307
installing the 4‑bin mailbox 310
installing the fax driver 316
installing the oset stacker 311
installing the print driver 316
installing the printer software 316
installing the staple finisher 312
installing the staple, hole punch
finisher 314
installing trays 306
internal option is not
detected 273
internal options
firmware card 294
flash memory 294
font card 294
internal solutions port 294
printer hard disk 294, 300
internal options, adding
print driver 317
internal solutions port
installing 302
J
jagged image
scanning from the ADF 290
jagged text
scanning from the ADF 290
jams
avoiding 218
Index 337
jams, clearing
in the standard bin 224
junk faxes
blocking 74
K
keyboard on the display
using 28
L
letterhead
copying on 53
loading 37
loading, 2100‑sheet tray 32
Lexmark Mobile Print
using 46
Lexmark ScanBack Utility
using 76
light print 247
LINE port 16
linking trays 38
loading
2100‑sheet tray 32
letterhead in 2100‑sheet
tray 32
loading the multipurpose
feeder 37
loading trays 29
locating jam areas 219
locating the security slot 163
M
Magnification mode
enabling 27
maintenance kit
ordering 188
making copies 52
managing screen saver 21
memory card
installing 296
menu
802.1x 149
About this Printer 94
Accessibility 88
Anonymous Data Collection 87
Bin Configuration 106
Confidential Print Setup 157
Configuration Menu 89
Copy Defaults 107
Custom Scan Sizes 105
Device 160
Disk Encryption 158
Eco‑Mode 82
Erase Temporary Data Files 159
Ethernet 145
E‑mail Defaults 125
E‑mail Setup 124
Fax 161
Fax Mode 111
Fax Server Setup 121
Fax Setup 111
Finishing 96
Flash Drive Print 139
Flash Drive Scan 135
FTP Defaults 130
HTML 103
HTTP/FTP Settings 150
Image 103
IPSec 148
Job Accounting 99
Layout 95
Local Accounts 154
Login Restrictions 157
LPD Configuration 149
Manage Permissions 153
Media Types 106
Menu Settings Page 160
Miscellaneous 159
Network 161
Network Overview 141
Notifications 84
Out of Service Erase 93
PCL 101
PDF 100
PostScript 100
Power Management 87
Preferences 81
Print 160
Quality 98
Remote Operator Panel 83
Restore Factory Defaults 89
Restrict external network
access 152
Schedule USB Devices 154
Security Audit Log 155
Setup 97
Shortcuts 161
SNMP 147
Solutions LDAP Settings 159
TCP/IP 146
ThinPrint 151
Tray Configuration 104
Troubleshooting 162
Universal Setup 104
USB 151
Visible Home Screen Icons 94
Web Link Setup 130
Wireless 142
Wi‑Fi Direct 144
XPS 100
Menu Settings Page
printing 162
missing information on the fax
cover page 285
mobile device
connecting to printer 169
printing from 46, 47
Mopria Print Service 46
moving the printer 12, 215
multipurpose feeder
loading 37
N
navigating the screen
using gestures 27
navigating the screen using
gestures 27
noise emission levels 320
nonvolatile memory
erasing 163
Non‑Lexmark supply 275
non‑volatile memory 164
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources 274
notices 320, 321, 323, 324, 328,
331
O
oset
stacker
installing 311
operating systems
supported 315
optional card
installing 298
ordering
maintenance kit 188
ordering supplies
imaging unit 188
staple cartridge 188
toner cartridge 186
P
paper
Universal size setting 29
Index 338
paper curl 276
paper jam
in the duplex area 223
in the fuser 223
paper jam in door A 221
paper jam in door C 223
paper jam in door H 229
paper jam in door N 228
paper jam in the 4‑bin
mailbox 228
paper jam in the automatic
document feeder 226
paper jam in the multipurpose
feeder 225
paper jam in the oset stacker
bin 229
paper jam in the staple finisher
bin 229
paper jam in trays 220
paper jam, clearing
automatic document
feeder 226
paper jams
avoiding 218
location 219
paper jams, clearing
in the standard bin 224
paper size
setting 29
paper type
setting 29
paper types
supported 42
parts status
checking 186
personal identification number
method 168
personal identification numbers
enabling 28
photos, copying 52
pick roller
replacing 197
pick roller in the multipurpose
feeder
cleaning 176
replacing 199
pick tires
cleaning 175
placing separator sheets
between copies
copying 53
poor fax print quality 284
power button light
understanding the status 17
power cord socket 16
power save modes
configuring 216
prepunched paper
loading 37
print driver
hardware options, adding 317
installing 316
print job
canceling from the computer 51
canceling from the printer
control panel 51
print jobs not printed 264
print quality
cleaning the scanner 172
print quality problems 238
Print Quality Test Pages 162
print quality troubleshooting
blank or white pages 239
crooked print 250
dark print 241
fine lines are not printed
correctly 242
folded or wrinkled paper 243
gray background on prints 244
horizontal light bands 256
light print 247
mottled print and dots 249
paper curl 276
print quality problems 238
repeating defects 264
skewed print 250
solid black pages 250
text or images cut o 253
toner easily rubs o 255
vertical dark bands 258
vertical dark lines 260
vertical dark lines or
streaks 261
vertical dark streaks with print
missing 262
vertical light bands 256
vertical white lines 257
print troubleshooting
collated printing does not
work 276
confidential and other held
documents do not print 268
envelope seals when
printing 275
incorrect margins 246
jammed pages are not
reprinted 279
job prints from the wrong
tray 267
job prints on the wrong
paper 267
paper frequently jams 278
print jobs do not print 264
slow printing 265
tray linking does not work 278
unable to read flash drive 270
printer
minimum clearances 12
selecting a location 12
shipping 216
printer configurations 13
printer display
adjusting the brightness 217
printer hard disk
encrypting 164
installing 300
printer hard disk memory 164
printer information
finding 10
printer is not responding 269
printer memory
erasing 163
printer menus 80
printer messages
Defective flash detected 273
Non‑Lexmark supply 275
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources 274
Replace cartridge, printer region
mismatch 274
Unformatted flash
detected 274
printer options troubleshooting
cannot detect internal
option 273
printer port settings
changing 170
printer ports 16
printer settings
restoring factory default 164
printer software
installing 316
printer status 17
printing
confidential print jobs 49
directory list 51
Index 339
font sample list 51
from a Cloud Connector
profile 50
from a computer 46
from a flash drive 47
from a mobile device 46, 47
held jobs 49
Menu Settings Page 162
using Mopria Print Service 46
using Wi‑Fi Direct 47
printing a directory list 51
printing a font sample list 51
printing a network setup
page 272
printing from a computer 46
printing from a flash drive 47
Push Button method 168
Q
QR codes
adding 23
R
recycling
Lexmark packaging 217
Lexmark products 217
reducing copies 53
removing paper jam
in door A 221
in door H 229
in door N 228
in mailbox bin 228
in the duplex unit 223
in the fuser 223
in the multipurpose feeder 225
in the
oset
stacker bin 229
in the staple finisher bin 229
in the staple, hole punch
finisher
231
in the staple, hole punch
finisher bin 231
in trays 220
removing staple jam 232, 235
repeat print jobs 49
Replace cartridge, printer region
mismatch 274
replacing
pick roller in the multipurpose
feeder 199
replacing parts
ADF pick roller 200
ADF separator roller 206
ADF torque limiter 209
fuser 193
pick roller 197
transfer roller 195
replacing supplies
imaging unit 191
staple cartridge 212, 214
toner cartridge 190
replacing the ADF feed
roller 203
replacing the ADF separator
roller 206
reports
printer status 166
printer usage 166
resetting
supply usage counters 275
resetting supply usage
counters 215
resetting the supply usage
counters 275
RJ‑11 adapter 70
running a slideshow 21
S
safety information 8, 9
saving paper 54
saving toner 54
Scan Center
setting up 22
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan to a computer 286
cannot scan to network
folder 287
jagged image when scanning
from the ADF 290
jagged text when scanning from
the ADF 290
partial copies of documents or
photos 288
poor copy quality 289
scan job was not
successful 290
scanner does not respond 292
scanning freezes the
computer 291
scanning takes too long 291
vertical dark streaks on output
when scanning from the
ADF 289
scanner
cleaning 172
scanner does not close 291
scanner glass
using 52, 55, 64, 76
scanning
to a Cloud Connector profile 79
to a computer 76
to an FTP server 77
to flash drive 78
using the automatic document
feeder (ADF) 76
using the scanner glass 76
scanning from ADF
jagged image 290
jagged text 290
scanning quality problem 289
scanning to a network folder 78
scanning to an FTP server
using the control panel 77
scheduling a fax 73
securing printer memory 164
security slot
locating 163
selecting a location for the
printer 12
sending e‑mail 63
sending fax 72
serial number, printer
finding 11
serial printing
setting up 171
setting the paper size 29
setting the paper type 29
setting the Universal paper
size 29
setting up
analog fax 65
setting up Device Quotas 22
setting up e‑mail alerts 166
setting up fax
country‑ or region‑specific 70
standard telephone line
connection 68
setting up fax function using
etherFAX 66
setting up serial printing 171
setting up the fax function using
fax server 67
shipping the printer 216
shortcut
Copy 21
Index 340
Email 21
Fax 21
FTP 21
shortcut, creating
e‑mail 63
fax destination 73
FTP address 78
shortcut, creating a
copy 54
shortcuts
creating 21
skewed print 250
Sleep mode
configuring 216
slow printing 265
SMB
scanning 78
SMTP settings
configuring 55
sorting multiple copies 53
spoken passwords
enabling 28
staple cartridge
ordering 188
replacing 212, 214
staple finisher
installing 312
staple, hole punch finisher
installing 314
statement of volatility 164
storing print jobs 49
supplies
conserving 217
supplies status
checking 186
supply notifications
configuring 166
supply usage counters
resetting 215, 275
supported applications 20
supported fax 65
supported file types 48
supported flash drives 48
supported operating
systems 315
supported paper sizes 39
supported paper types 42
supported paper weights 43
T
temperature around the
printer 322
toner cartridge
ordering 186
replacing 190
toner darkness
adjusting 267
touch screen
cleaning 172
transfer roller
replacing 195
trays
linking 38
loading 29
unlinking 38
troubleshooting
cannot connect printer to
Wi‑Fi 271
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 270
print quality problems 238
printer is not responding 269
troubleshooting, copy
partial copies of documents or
photos 288
poor copy quality 289
scanner does not close 291
scanner does not respond 292
troubleshooting, e‑mail
cannot send e‑mails 280
troubleshooting, fax
caller ID is not shown 280
can send but not receive faxes
using analog fax 283
cannot send faxes using analog
fax 283
cannot send or receive faxes
using analog fax 281
cannot send or receive faxes
using etherFAX 284
cannot send the fax cover page
from the computer 285
cannot set up etherFAX 283
missing information on the fax
cover page 285
poor print quality 284
troubleshooting, print
collated printing does not
work 276
confidential and other held
documents do not print 268
envelope seals when
printing 275
incorrect margins 246
jammed pages are not
reprinted 279
job prints from the wrong
tray 267
job prints on the wrong
paper 267
paper frequently jams 278
print jobs do not print 264
slow printing 265
tray linking does not work 278
troubleshooting, print quality
blank or white pages 239
crooked print 250
dark print 241
fine lines are not printed
correctly 242
folded or wrinkled paper 243
gray background on prints 244
horizontal light bands 256
light print 247
mottled print and dots 249
paper curl 276
repeating defects 264
skewed print 250
solid black pages 250
text or images cut o 253
toner easily rubs o 255
vertical dark bands 258
vertical dark lines 260
vertical dark lines or
streaks 261
vertical dark streaks with print
missing 262
vertical light bands 256
vertical white lines 257
troubleshooting, printer options
cannot detect internal
option 273
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan to a computer 286
cannot scan to a network
folder 287
jagged image when scanning
from the ADF 290
jagged text when scanning from
the ADF 290
partial copies of documents or
photos 288
poor copy quality 289
scan job was not
successful 290
scanner does not close 291
Index 341
scanner does not respond 292
vertical dark streaks on output
when scanning from the
ADF 289
two‑sided copying 53
U
unable to read flash drive
troubleshooting, print 270
Unformatted
flash
detected 274
Universal paper size
setting 29
unlinking trays 38
updating
firmware
318
USB cable 16
USB port 16
enabling 270
using Customer Support 23
using Display Customization 21
using genuine Lexmark parts and
supplies 186
using QR Code Generator 23
using the ADF
copying 52
using the automatic document
feeder (ADF) 52, 55, 64, 76
using the control panel 17
using the home screen 19
using the scanner
glass 52, 55, 64, 76
copying 52
V
verify print jobs 49
vertical dark lines 260
vertical dark lines on prints 261
vertical dark streaks on output
when scanning from the
ADF 289
vertical streaks on prints 261
viewing a fax log 74
viewing reports 166
virtual keyboard
using 28
Voice Guidance
activating 27
speech rate 27
Voice Guidance speech rate
adjusting 27
volatile memory 164
erasing 163
W
white lines 257
white pages 239
wireless network
connecting the printer to 167
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup 168
wireless networking 167
Wi‑Fi Direct
configuring 169
enabling 169
printing from a mobile
device 47
Wi‑Fi network
deactivating 170
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
wireless network 168
wrinkled paper 243
Index 342
